Canon Imageclass Mf9150C Multifunction Printer 2232B002Aa Users Manual Basic Operation Guide

Canon-Color-Imageclass-Mf8450C-Operation-Guide-588389 canon-color-imageclass-mf8450c-operation-guide-588389

If not then MF9170c_BASIC_en_us_R Manual: ://gdlp01.c-wss.com/gds/4/0300001734/01/MF9170c_BASIC_en_us_R

2232B002AA to the manual 14242eb2-4294-48eb-85ee-62ef9c77ee62

2015-01-23

: Canon Canon-Imageclass-Mf9150C-Multifunction-Printer-2232B002Aa-Users-Manual-239935 canon-imageclass-mf9150c-multifunction-printer-2232b002aa-users-manual-239935 canon pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 504 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Before Using the Machine
Please read this guide before operating this product.
After you  nish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.
Basic Operation Guide
Originals and Print Media
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Copying
Fax
E-mail
Printing
Scanning
Network
Setting from a PC
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Appendix
Machine Settings
Manuals for the Machine
i
Manuals for the Machine
Manuals for the Machine
The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
Considerable effort has been made to make sure that the manuals for the machine are free of inaccuracies
and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our products, if you need an exact specification,
please contact Canon.
The machine illustration on the cover may differ slightly from your machine.
●
●
Read this manual first.
Starter Guide
What you can do with the machine
Machine setup
Connection and settings before using the
machine
Connecting the machine to a network
Software installation
●
●
●
●
●
Read this manual to learn the
required settings and connections
before using the machine.
Read this manual next.
Basic Operation Guide
Safety instructions
Registering destinations in the Address Book
Copy
Fax
E-mail
Specifications
●
●
●
●
●
●
Read this manual to learn
information about basic operations
and machine functions.
Read the sections of these manuals that correspond to your intended use.
e-Manual
(Located on User Software CD)
Advanced features
Scan
Network
Remote user interface
Security
Troubleshooting
●
●
●
●
●
●
Read this manual to learn detailed
information about advanced
machine operations and functions,
and how to customize machine
settings.
This Document
Overview of Machine Functions
ii
Copying
In addition to the Color and B/W
copying, you can use various copy
functions.
Basic Operation Guide
Copying (see on p. 4-1)
e-Manual
Copying
Overview of Machine Functions
Depending on the system conguration and product purchased, some functions may not be
available.
Faxing
In addition to the normal faxing, you
can send faxes from a computer and
send I-faxes.
Basic Operation Guide
Fax (see on p. 5-1)
e-Manual
Fax
Printing
In addition to the printing from a
computer, you can print a document
directly from memory media.
Basic Operation Guide
Printing (see on p. 7-1)
e-Manual
Printing
Scanning
You can store the scanning
documents to the computer, the le
server and the USB memory.
Basic Operation Guide
Scanning (see on p. 8-1)
e-Manual
Scanning
Overview of Machine Functions
iii
Network
This machine can be connected to a
network. Connecting to a network
enables you to use various functions.
Basic Operation Guide
Network (see on p. 9-1)
e-Manual
Network Settings
Remote User
Interface
You can set and manage this machine
easily and quickly from a computer.
Basic Operation Guide
Setting from a PC (see on p. 10-1)
e-Manual
Setting from a PC
E-mail
function
Scanned documents can be sent as e-
mail le attachments.
Basic Operation Guide
E-mail (see on p. 6-1)
e-Manual
E-mail
Security
function
You can limit the use of the machine by
setting the IDs. You can also limit the use of
some functions.
e-Manual
Security
Contents
iv
Contents
Manuals for the Machine ..................................i
Overview of Machine Functions .................... ii
Contents ............................................................ iv
Preface ............................................................... ix
Important Safety Instructions ......................... ix
Handling and Maintenance ............................. ix
Location ....................................................................x
Power Supply ........................................................ xi
Telephone Equipment ...................................... xii
Customer Support (U.S.A.) .............................. xii
Customer Support (Canada) ........................... xii
How to Use This Guide .................................. xiii
Symbols Used in This Manual .......................xiii
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual ...... xiii
Illustrations Used in This Manual .................xiv
Legal Notices ................................................... xv
IPv6 Ready Logo ................................................. xv
Trademarks ........................................................... xv
Copyright............................................................... xv
Third Party Software .........................................xvi
Disclaimers ...........................................................xvi
About the Part Containing Mercury
(Applicable Only to the USA).........................xvi
For CA, USA only ................................................xvi
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your
Product and the Use of Images ...................xvii
Users in the U.S.A. ........................................ xviii
Pre-Installation Requirements for
Canon Facsimile Equipment ........................xviii
Connection of the Equipment ...................... xix
In Case of Equipment Malfunction ............. xix
Rights of the Telephone Company .............. xix
FCC Notice ............................................................. xx
Users in Canada ............................................. xxi
Pre-Installation Requirements for
Canon Facsimile Equipment .......................... xxi
Notice ...................................................................xxii
Contents
Laser Safety .................................................. xxiv
CDRH Regulations ...........................................xxiv
1 Before Using the Machine ........1-1
Machine Components ..................................1-2
External View (Front) ....................................... 1-2
External View (Back) ........................................ 1-4
Internal View ...................................................... 1-5
Control Panel ..................................................1-6
Main Control Panel .......................................... 1-6
Registering the Custom Keys ....................... 1-8
Left Side of the Control Panel ....................1-10
Right Side of the Control Panel .................1-10
Display Parts and Functions ..................... 1-11
Main Menu Screen .........................................1-11
Copy Top Screen .............................................1-12
Send Type Selection Screen........................1-13
Store Type Selection Screen .......................1-14
Select Memory Media Screen (Color
imageCLASS MF9170c/9150c Only) ........1-14
Log In Mode .....................................................1-14
Toner Cartridges ......................................... 1-15
Maintaining the Toner Cartridges ............1-16
Checking the Toner Level ............................1-17
Checking the Device Information ........... 1-18
Entering Characters ................................... 1-19
Telephone Line Setting ............................. 1-20
Timer Settings ............................................. 1-22
Setting the Sleep Mode ...............................1-22
Setting Auto Clear Time ...............................1-23
Setting the Daylight Saving Time .............1-24
2 Originals and Print Media ........2-1
Originals Requirements ...............................2-2
Scanning Area ................................................2-3
Placing Originals ............................................2-4
Contents
v
Contents
On the Platen Glass .......................................... 2-4
In the Feeder ...................................................... 2-5
Paper Requirements .....................................2-7
Printable Area ................................................2-9
Loading Paper ............................................. 2-10
In the Paper Drawer .......................................2-10
In the Stack Bypass Tray ...............................2-15
Setting Paper Size and Type ..................... 2-20
For the Stack Bypass Tray .............................2-20
For the Paper Drawer ....................................2-22
Relationship between Original
Orientation and Preprinted Paper
Output Chart ............................................... 2-24
3 Registering Destinations in
the Address Book ......................3-1
Storing/Editing Address Book .....................3-2
Registering Fax Numbers in the Address
Book ...................................................................... 3-2
Registering E-Mail Addresses in the
Address Book ..................................................... 3-7
Registering I-Fax Addresses in the
Address Book ...................................................3-10
Registering File Server Addresses in
the Address Book............................................3-12
Registering Group Addresses in the
Address Book ...................................................3-18
Checking/Editing Addresses Registered
in the Address Book .......................................3-21
Erasing Addresses from the Address
Book ....................................................................3-24
Storing/Editing One-Touch ....................... 3-26
Registering Fax Numbers in
One-Touch .........................................................3-26
Registering E-Mail Addresses in
One-Touch .........................................................3-31
Registering I-Fax Addresses in
One-Touch .........................................................3-34
Registering File Server Addresses in
One-Touch .........................................................3-37
Registering Group Addresses in
One-Touch .........................................................3-44
Checking/Editing Addresses Registered
in One-Touch ....................................................3-47
Erasing Addresses Registered in
One-Touch .........................................................3-50
4 Copying .....................................4-1
Overview of Copy Functions .......................4-2
Basic Copying Method ..................................4-4
Canceling Copy Jobs .....................................4-6
Selecting Color Mode ...................................4-7
Selecting Paper Source .................................4-9
Copying on Papers in Drawers..................... 4-9
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard
Paper Sizes ........................................................4-11
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular
Sizes of Paper ...................................................4-13
Using Stack Bypass Tray with
Envelopes ..........................................................4-15
Adjusting Density ....................................... 4-17
Adjusting Base Color .....................................4-19
2-Sided Copying ......................................... 4-22
1 to 2-Sided Copying .....................................4-23
2 to 2-Sided Copying .....................................4-25
2 to 1-Sided Copying .....................................4-27
Enlarge/Reduce Images ............................ 4-30
Preset Zoom .....................................................4-30
Custom Copy Ratio ........................................4-32
Selecting Image Quality ............................ 4-34
Multiple Originals onto One Sheet
(N on 1) ......................................................... 4-36
Adjusting Sharpness .................................. 4-39
Erasing Shadows/Lines .............................. 4-41
Original Frame Erase .....................................4-42
Book Frame Erase ...........................................4-45
Binding Erase ...................................................4-48
Adjusting Color Balance ............................ 4-51
Registering Color Balance ...........................4-53
Recalling Registered Color Balance .........4-55
Contents
vi
Contents
Deleting Color Balance .................................4-56
Collating Copies .......................................... 4-57
Making Multiple Copies ............................ 4-59
Checking Current Settings ........................ 4-60
Frequently Used Settings (Mode
Memory) ....................................................... 4-61
Registering Mode Memory .........................4-61
Recalling Mode Memory..............................4-63
Checking Mode Memory .............................4-64
Deleting Mode Memory...............................4-65
Changing Standard Mode ......................... 4-66
Initializing Standard Mode ....................... 4-68
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/
Checking Copy Logs ................................... 4-69
Checking Copy Jobs ......................................4-69
Canceling Copy Jobs .....................................4-70
Checking Copy Logs ......................................4-71
5 Fax ..............................................5-1
Overview of Fax Functions ..........................5-2
Introduction to Using Fax Functions .........5-4
Methods for Receiving Faxes........................ 5-4
Selecting the Receive Mode ......................... 5-9
Setting the Current Date and Time ..........5-12
Setting the Type of Telephone Line .........5-13
Registering the Machine’s Name ..............5-14
Registering Your Machine’s Fax
Number ..............................................................5-16
Sending Fax Documents ........................... 5-17
Basic Methods for Sending Faxes .............5-17
Calling the Recipient before Sending
Fax Documents (Manual Sending) ...........5-19
Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing ...5-21
Dialing an Overseas Number (With
Pauses)................................................................5-22
Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes...........5-25
Basic Methods for Sending PC Faxes .......5-27
Canceling Sending Fax Documents ........ 5-29
Specifying Destinations ............................ 5-30
Specifying a New Fax Number ...................5-30
Using the Address Book ...............................5-32
Using the One-Touch ....................................5-34
Using the Group Addresses ........................5-36
Sending Originals to More Than One
Location (Broadcasting) ...............................5-39
Selecting Resolution .................................. 5-41
Adjusting Density ....................................... 5-42
Manual Exposure Adjustment ..................5-42
Adjusting Base Color ....................................5-43
Selecting Image Quality ............................ 5-45
2-Sided Original .......................................... 5-47
Sending Originals at a Preset Time
(Delayed Sending) ...................................... 5-49
Direct Sending ............................................ 5-52
Favorites ....................................................... 5-54
Registering Favorites .....................................5-54
Erasing Favorites .............................................5-58
Using the Favorites ........................................5-61
Checking Settings for Recalled
Favorites .............................................................5-62
Job Recall ..................................................... 5-64
ECM Transmission ....................................... 5-67
Adjusting the Pause Time ......................... 5-69
Redialing Automatically When the Line
Is Busy (Auto Redial)................................... 5-71
Checking the Dial Tone before
Sending ........................................................ 5-74
Standard Send Settings ............................. 5-76
Storing the Standard Send Settings ........5-76
Restoring the Standard Send Settings
to Their Default................................................5-78
Printing the TX Terminal ID ...................... 5-80
Adjusting Sharpness .................................. 5-83
Specifying What to Display on the
Screen for a Send Operation .................... 5-85
Restoring the Send Function Settings
to Their Default ........................................... 5-87
Send Start Speed ........................................ 5-89
Printing Received Documents on Both
Sides of Paper .............................................. 5-91
Contents
vii
Contents
Reducing a Received Document .............. 5-93
Printing Footer Information on a
Received Document ................................... 5-96
Specifying the Way of Printing When
Toner Is Low ................................................. 5-98
ECM Reception .......................................... 5-100
Setting the Incoming Ring Tone ............ 5-102
Receiving Documents Manually with
an External Telephone (Remote
Reception) .................................................. 5-104
Activating the Remote Reception ......... 5-104
Receiving Documents with the
Remote Reception ...................................... 5-105
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for
the Manual RX Mode................................ 5-106
Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the
Unidentified Senders ............................... 5-108
Receive Start Speed ................................. 5-110
Receiving Documents in Memory
without Printing Out (Memory Lock
Reception) .................................................. 5-112
Printing All Documents Stored in the
Memory Lock Reception Mode .............. 5-115
Forwarding Received Fax Documents .. 5-117
Specifying Forwarding Settings ............. 5-117
Sending Documents in Memory to a
Different Destination ................................. 5-129
Handling Documents with
Forwarding Errors ........................................ 5-131
Resending Documents with
Forwarding Errors ........................................ 5-133
Checking/Changing the Status of
Documents with Forwarding Errors ..... 5-135
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax
Documents in Memory ............................ 5-138
Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission
Documents .................................................... 5-138
Checking/Deleting Fax Reception
Documents .................................................... 5-140
Checking/Printing the Fax Log ............... 5-141
6 E-mail .........................................6-1
Overview of E-Mail Functions .....................6-2
Introduction to Using E-Mail Functions ....6-4
Basic E-Mail Operations ................................6-5
Sending E-Mail Documents .......................... 6-5
Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents ..... 6-7
7 Printing ......................................7-1
Overview of Print Functions ........................7-2
Introduction to Using Print Functions .......7-4
Printing Documents from Computer .........7-5
Scaling Documents .......................................7-7
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet ......7-9
2-Sided Printing .......................................... 7-10
Printing from Memory Media (Direct
Print) ............................................................. 7-11
Memory Media Supported by This
Machine .............................................................7-11
Data Supported by This Machine .............7-12
Inserting Memory Media .............................7-13
Removing Memory Media...........................7-14
Printing from Memory Media ....................7-14
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/
Checking Print Logs ................................... 7-27
Checking Print Jobs .......................................7-27
Canceling Print Jobs ......................................7-28
Checking Print Logs .......................................7-29
8 Scanning ....................................8-1
Overview of Scanner Functions ..................8-2
Introduction to Using Scanner
Functions .........................................................8-4
For Scanning Documents to a File
Server .................................................................... 8-4
For Scanning Documents from a
Networked Computer ..................................... 8-4
Basic Scanning Operations ..........................8-5
Scanning Documents to a File Server ....... 8-5
Scanning Documents to a USB Memory .. 8-7
Contents
viii
Contents
Scanning Documents from a
Networked Computer ..................................... 8-9
9 Network .....................................9-1
Flowchart for Setting Up Network .............9-2
What is the Network? ....................................9-3
Overview of Network Functions .................9-4
10 Settings from a PC ................10-1
Overview of Remote UI ............................. 10-2
Starting the Remote UI .............................. 10-4
11 Maintenance .........................11-1
Cleaning the Machine ................................ 11-2
Exterior ...............................................................11-2
Interior ................................................................11-3
Scanning Area ..................................................11-4
Replacing the Toner Cartridges ............... 11-7
When a Message Appears ...........................11-7
Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a
New One ............................................................11-8
Recycling Used Cartridges ...................... 11-13
The Clean Earth Campaign ...................... 11-13
U.S.A. PROGRAM .......................................... 11-14
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA
PROGRAMME ................................................ 11-17
Transporting the Machine ...................... 11-19
12 Troubleshooting ...................12-1
Clearing Jams .............................................. 12-2
Original Jams ...................................................12-3
Paper Delivery Tray ........................................12-5
Duplex Unit .......................................................12-6
Stack Bypass Tray ............................................12-8
Paper Drawer 1 ............................................. 12-10
Optional Paper Drawer (Paper
Drawer 2) ........................................................ 12-11
Inside of the Machine ................................ 12-13
Fixing Unit ...................................................... 12-16
Back Cover...................................................... 12-18
When the Message Does Not
Disappear ................................................... 12-19
If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not
Installed Correctly .................................... 12-22
Error Messages .......................................... 12-25
Error Codes ................................................ 12-30
If <Set the correct paper. > is
displayed .................................................... 12-36
Reloading the Paper ................................... 12-36
Changing the Paper Size Setting ........... 12-36
If a Power Failure Occurs ......................... 12-39
If You Cannot Solve a Problem ............... 12-40
Customer Support (U.S.A.) ....................... 12-40
Customer Support (Canada) .................... 12-40
13 Machine Settings ..................13-1
Machine Settings ........................................ 13-2
Printing USER’S DATA LIST ...........................13-2
Accessing the Setting Menu .......................13-3
Setting Menu ............................................... 13-5
Paper Settings ..................................................13-5
Volume Settings ..............................................13-6
Common Settings ..........................................13-6
Communications Settings ...........................13-8
Address Book Settings ............................... 13-11
Printer Settings ............................................. 13-13
Timer Settings ............................................... 13-17
Adjustment/Cleaning ................................ 13-18
Report Settings ............................................ 13-19
System Management Settings ............... 13-19
14 Appendix ...............................14-1
Specifications .............................................. 14-2
Index ............................................................. 14-7
Preface
ix
Preface
Preface
Thank you for choosing a Canon product. Before using the machine, please read the
following instructions for your safety.
Important Safety Instructions
Except as specically described in this guide, do not attempt to service the machine yourself. Never attempt to disassemble the
machine: opening and removing its interior covers will expose you to dangerous voltages and other risks. For all service, contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.
Handling and Maintenance
Be careful when removing printed paper from output trays or when aligning it, because it may be hot and result in burn injury.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine.
Do not subject the machine to strong physical shocks or vibrations.
Always unplug the machine before moving or cleaning it.
To avoid paper jams, never unplug the power cord, open the left cover or add or remove paper in the
machine while printing.
When transporting the machine, be sure to remove the toner cartridge from the machine.
Place the toner cartridge in its original protective bag or wrap it in a thick cloth to prevent exposure to light.
Always use the hand grips (on the left and right side) of the machine when you lift the machine. Never lift
the machine by any of its trays or attachments.
Do not insert any objects into the slots or openings on the machine since they may touch dangerous
voltage points or short out parts. This could result in re or electric shock.
Do not allow small objects (such as pins, paper clips, or staples) to fall into the machine.
To avoid spillage in or around the machine, do not eat or drink near it.
Keep the machine clean. Dust accumulation can prevent the machine from operating properly.
Toner cartridge for this machine will be available for at least seven (7) years (or any such longer period as
required by applicable laws) after production of this machine model has been discontinued.
Turn o the main power switch and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and contact your local
authorized Canon dealer in any of the following cases:
When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
If liquid or small object has fallen into the machine.
If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.
If the machine does not operate normally when you have followed the instructions in this guide.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
•
•
•
•
Preface
x
Preface
Adjust only those controls that are covered by the instructions in this guide. Improper adjustment of
other controls may result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore
the product to normal operation.
If the machine has been dropped.
If the machine exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for servicing.
Do not place your hands, hair, clothing, etc., near the exit and feed rollers. Even if the machine is not in
operation, your hands, hair, or clothing may get caught in the rollers, which may result in personal injury or
damage if the machine suddenly starts printing.
Be careful when removing printed paper from paper delivery tray or when aligning it, because it may be hot
and result in burn injury.
Location
Place the machine on a at, stable, vibration-free surface that is strong enough to support its weight.
Place the machine in a cool, dry, clean, well ventilated place.
Make sure the area is free from dust.
Make sure the location is not exposed to high temperature or humidity.
Keep the machine away from direct sunlight as this can damage it. If you have to place the machine near a
window, install heavy curtains or blinds.
Do not use the machine near water. Make sure that no wet or humid objects come into contact with the
machine.
Do not use or store the machine outdoors.
Do not place the machine near devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic elds, such as speakers.
If possible, place the machine near an existing telephone line outlet for easy connection of the telephone
line cord, and to avoid the expense of installing a new outlet.
Place the machine near a standard 120 V AC (60 Hz) power outlet.
•
•
•
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preface
xi
Preface
To ensure reliable operation of the machine and to protect it from overheating (which can cause it to
operate abnormally and create a re risk), do not block the exhaust vent. Never block or cover any openings
on the machine by placing it on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. Do not place the machine in a
cupboard or built-in installation, or near a radiator or other heat source unless proper ventilation is
provided. Leave at least 4" (100 mm) around all sides of the machine.
Do not stack boxes or furniture around the power outlet. Keep the area free so you can reach the outlet
quickly. If you notice anything unusual (smoke, strange odors, noises) around the machine, unplug the
power cord immediately. Contact Canon Customer Care Center.
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord, and do not place the machine where the cord will be
walked on. Make sure the cord is not knotted or kinked.
Power Supply
During electrical storms, turn o the main power switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
(Please note that any data stored in the memory, including received fax documents, will be deleted about
60 minutes after you turn o the main power switch or unplug the power cord.)
Whenever you turn o the main power switch, wait at least ve seconds before you turn it on again.
Do not plug the power cord into an uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
This product emits low level magnetic ux. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from this product
and consult your doctor.
–
–
–
–
–
–
Preface
xii
Preface
Telephone Equipment
When using telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of re, electric shock, and
injury to persons, including the following:
1. Do not use this machine near water (i.e., near a bathtub, kitchen sink, or laundry tub), or in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
2. Avoid using the telephone during an electrical storm, as there may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Customer Support (U.S.A.)
Your machine is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble-free operation. If you encounter a
problem with the machine’s operation, try to solve it by using the information in Chapter 12. If you cannot
solve the problem or if you think your machine needs servicing, contact Canon Customer Care Center at 1-
800-828-4040 between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST for U.S.A. and 9:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST for
Canada Monday through Friday and 10:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. on Saturday. On-line support for 24 hours is also
available at the website.
http://www.canontechsupport.com/
Customer Support (Canada)
Canon Canada Inc., oers a full range of customer technical support options*:
For step-by-step troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver or document downloads, and
answers to frequently asked questions, visit http://www.canon.ca/
Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still
under warranty 1-800-652-2666
For the location of the authorized service facility nearest you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or 1-800-652-2666
If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are
available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http://
www.canon.ca/
* Support program specics are subject to change without notice.
–
–
–
–
How to Use This Guide
xiii
How to Use This Guide
How to Use This Guide
Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used throughout the manuals for the machine and indicate the warnings, cautions
and notes you should keep in mind when using the machine.
Indicates a warning that may lead to death or serious injury if not observed.
Explains how to avoid actions that could injure you or damage your machine.
Explains operating restrictions and how to avoid minor diculties.
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys and buttons to be pressed are
expressed in this manual.
Operation Panel Keys: <Key icon> + (Key name)
Example: (Stop).
Buttons on the computer operation screen: [Button name]
Example: [OK]
Information in the display appears in angle brackets: <Load paper.>.
–
–
How to Use This Guide
xiv
How to Use This Guide
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Illustrations used in this manual are the model Color imageCLASS MF9170c (with no optional equipment).
When there is any dierence among Color imageCLASS MF9170c, Color imageCLASS MF9150c and Color
imageCLASS MF8450c, it is clearly indicated in the text, e.g., ”Color imageCLASS MF9170c Only.”
Legal Notices
xv
Legal Notices
Legal Notices
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Canon U.S.A., Inc. has determined that this product meets
the ENERGY STAR Program for energy eciency.
The International ENERGY STAR Oce Equipment Program is an international program
that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other oce
equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that
eectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business
proprietors can participate voluntarily.
The targeted products are oce equipment, such as computers, displays, printers,
facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos are uniform among participating
nations.
IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1
established by the IPv6 Forum.
Trademarks
Canon, the Canon logo, Color imageRUNNER, and imageWARE are trademarks of Canon Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Windows Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective
owners.
Copyright
Copyright © 2008 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without
the prior written permission of Canon Inc.
UFST: Copyright © 1989-2003 Monotype Imaging, Inc.
Legal Notices
xvi
Legal Notices
Third Party Software
This product includes software and/or software modules that are licensed by third parties (LICENSORS). Use
and distribution of this software and/or software modules (the “SOFTWARE”) are subject to conditions (1)
through (9) below.
(1) You agree that you will comply with any applicable export control laws, restrictions or regulations of the
countries involved in the event that the SOFTWARE is shipped, transferred or exported into any country.
(2) LICENSORS retain in all respects the title, ownership and intellectual property rights in and to the
SOFTWARE. Except as expressly provided herein, no license or right, expressed or implied, is hereby conveyed
or granted by Canon’s licenser to you for any intellectual property of LICENSORS.
(3) You may use the SOFTWARE solely for use with the Canon product you purchased (the “PRODUCT”).
(4) You may not assign, sublicense, market, distribute, or transfer the SOFTWARE to any third party without
prior written consent of Canon and LICENSORS.
(5) Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may transfer the SOFTWARE only when (a) you assign all of your rights
to the PRODUCT and all rights and obligations under the conditions to transferee and (b) such transferee
agrees to be bound by all these conditions.
(6) You may not decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise reduce the code of the SOFTWARE to
human readable form.
(7) You may not modify, adapt, translate, rent, lease or loan the SOFTWARE or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE.
(8) You are not entitled to remove or make separate copies of the SOFTWARE from the PRODUCT.
(9) The human-readable portion (the source code) of the SOFTWARE is not licensed to you.
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.
CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY
NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
About the Part Containing Mercury (Applicable Only to the USA)
LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF
ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS.
For CA, USA only
Included battery contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.
Legal Notices
xvii
Legal Notices
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as
scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in
criminal and/or civil liability.
A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are
uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular
document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in
advance with your legal advisor for guidance.
Paper Money–Travelers Checks–
Money Orders–Food Stamps–
Certicates of Deposit–Passports–
Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled) –Immigration Papers–
Identifying Badges or Insignias–Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or
uncanceled)
–
Selective Service or Draft Papers–Bonds or Other Certicates of Indebtedness–
Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental
Agencies
–Stock Certicates–
Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certicates of Title–Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without
Permission of Copyright Owner
–
Users in the U.S.A.
xviii
Users in the U.S.A.
Users in the U.S.A.
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk. See p. 14-2 for the machine’s weight and dimensions.
B. Order Information
1. Only a single line, touch-tone or rotary telephone set is to be used.
2. Order an RJ11-C modular jack (USOC code), which should be installed by the telephone company. If
the RJ11-C jack is not present, installation cannot occur.
3. Order a regular voice grade line or the equivalent from your telephone company’s business
representative.
Use one line per machine.
DDD (DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL) LINE
-or-
IDDD (INTERNATIONAL DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL) LINE IF YOU COMMUNICATE OVERSEAS
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, e.g. the 2500 (Touch Tone) or 500 (Rotary/
Pulse Dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX machine without “Call Waiting” can be used with the
machine. Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send non-standard signals to individual
telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a fax error. This machine is not supported on Voice
Over Internet Protocol (VOIP).
C. Power Requirements
This equipment should be connected to a standard 120-volt AC, three-wire grounded outlet only. Do
not connect this machine to an outlet or power line shared with other appliances that cause “electrical
noise.” Air conditioners, electric typewriters, copiers, and machines of this sort generate electrical noise
which often interferes with communications equipment and the sending and receiving of documents.
Users in the U.S.A.
xix
Users in the U.S.A.
Connection of the Equipment
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the
rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identier in the
format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular jack are provided with this equipment. This equipment is
designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack
which is Part 68 compliant. See the Starter Guide for details.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to
a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed ve (5.0). To be certain of the
number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local
telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identier that has the format US:
AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 10 is a REN of 1.0).
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company.
Connection to party lines is subjected to state taris.
In Case of Equipment Malfunction
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures described in this guide,
disconnect the equipment from the telephone line, unplug the network cable (if connected), and unplug the
power cord. The telephone line should not be reconnected or the power cord plugged in until the problem is
completely resolved. Users should contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities for servicing of equipment.
Information regarding Authorized Service Facility locations can be obtained by calling Canon Customer Care
Center (1-800-828-4040).
Rights of the Telephone Company
Should the equipment cause harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may temporarily
disconnect service. The telephone company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and services
which may aect the operation of this equipment. When such changes are necessary, the telephone company
is required to give adequate prior notice to the user.
Users in the U.S.A.
xx
Users in the U.S.A.
FCC Notice
Color imageCLASS MF9170c/MF9150c/MF8450c: F151100
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept an interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
o and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modications to the equipment unless otherwise specied in this manual. If such
changes or modications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A., Inc.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
TEL No. 1-516-328-5600
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the rst page of the transmission, the date and
time it is sent and an identication of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message
and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.
In order to program this information into the machine, follow the instructions in the Starter Guide.
•
•
•
•
Users in the U.S.A.
xxi
Users in the U.S.A.
Users in Canada
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk. See p. 14-2 for the machine’s weight and dimensions.
B. Order Information
1. Provide only a single-line to touch-tone or rotary telephone set terminated with a standard 4-pin
modular phone plug. (Touch-tone is recommended if available in your area.)
2. Order an CA11A modular jack (USOC code), which should be installed by the telephone company. If
the CA11A jack is not present, installation cannot occur.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business representative. The line
should be a regular voice grade line or equivalent. Use one line per machine.
DDD (DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL) LINE
-or-
IDDD (INTERNATIONAL DIRECT DISTANCE DIAL) LINE IF YOU COMMUNICATE OVERSEAS
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, e.g., the 2500 (touch tone) or 500
(rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX machine without “Camp On” signals is also
permissible with the machine. Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send non-standard
signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a fax error.
C. Power Requirements
The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded receptacle (Single or Duplex). It should be
independent from copiers, heaters, air conditioners or any electric equipment that is thermostatically
controlled. The rated value is 120 volts and 15 amperes. The CA11A modular jack should be relatively
close to the power outlet to facilitate installation.
Users in the U.S.A.
xxii
Users in the U.S.A.
Notice
This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specications. This is
conrmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signies that
registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical
specications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment.
Cet appareil est conforme aux Spécications techniques des équipements terminaux de I’lndustrie du Canada.
Ceci est conrmé par le numéro d’enregistrement. L’abréviation IC précédant le numéro d’enregistrement
signie que I’enregistrement a été eectué sur la base de la Déclaration de conformité indiquant que le
produit est conforme aux spécications techniques du Canada. Ceci n’implique pas que le produit ait été
approuvé par I’industrie du Canada.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of
the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of
connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent
degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certied equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any
repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution
may be particularly important in rural areas.
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or
electrician, as appropriate.
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference- Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Users in the U.S.A.
xxiii
Users in the U.S.A.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 1.0. The REN assigned to each terminal
equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a
telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only
to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed ve.
Le Nombre d’équivalence Ringer (REN) de cet appareil terminal est 1.0. Le REN attribué à chaque équipement
terminal fournit une indication sur le nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés sur une
interface téléphonique. La terminaison sur une interface peut consister en n’importe quelle combinaison
d’appareils, à la condition seulement que la somme des Nombres d’équivalence Ringer de tous les appareils
ne soit pas supérieure à 5.
CANON CANADA INC.
1-800-652-2666
9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding holidays)
Laser Safety
xxiv
Laser Safety
Laser Safety
This machine complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the
Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the machine does not produce hazardous
radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely conned within protective housings and external
covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
CDRH Regulations
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products
manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specied in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
The label is attached to the laser scanner machine inside the machine and is not in a user access area.
Before Using the Machine
1-1
Machine Components .................................................1-2
External View (Front) ..........................................................1-2
External View (Back) ............................................................1-4
Internal View ..........................................................................1-5
Control Panel ...............................................................1-6
Main Control Panel ..............................................................1-6
Registering the Custom Keys ..........................................1-8
Left Side of the Control Panel ....................................... 1-10
Right Side of the Control Panel .................................... 1-10
Display Parts and Functions .....................................1-11
Main Menu Screen ...........................................................1-11
Copy Top Screen ................................................................1-12
Send Type Selection Screen .......................................... 1-13
Store Type Selection Screen.......................................... 1-14
Select Memory Media Screen
(Color imageCLASS MF9170c/9150c Only) ............. 1-14
Log In Mode ........................................................................ 1-14
Toner Cartridges ........................................................1-15
Maintaining the Toner Cartridges ............................... 1-16
Checking the Toner Level...............................................1-17
Checking the Device Information ............................1-18
Entering Characters ...................................................1-19
Telephone Line Setting .............................................1-20
Timer Settings ............................................................1-22
Setting the Sleep Mode ..................................................1-22
Setting Auto Clear Time .................................................1-23
Setting the Daylight Saving Time ............................... 1-24
This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine, such as the names of the parts and their
functions, and how to set up the machine to send/receive faxes.
Before Using the
Machine
1
Chapter
Before Using the Machine
1-2
Machine Components
Machine Components
This section describes the names and functions of all the parts on the outside and inside of
the machine.
External View (Front)
Before Using the Machine
1-3
Machine Components
①Feeder
Originals placed in the Feeder are automatically
fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area. The
feeder also automatically turns over two-sided
originals to make one- or two-sided copies.
②Slide Guides
Adjust the slide guides to match the width of the
originals.
③Original Supply Tray
Originals placed here are automatically fed sheet
by sheet to the scanning area of the platen glass.
Place originals into this tray with the surface that
you want to scan face up.
④Original Output Tray
Originals that have been scanned from the
original supply tray are output to the original
output tray in the order that they are fed into the
feeder.
⑤Original Stopper
Prevents the originals from falling o the paper
delivery tray.
Open the stopper from its original position for
LTR/A4 size paper. For LGL size paper, pull out the
extension rst, and then open the stopper.
⑥Control Panel
Machine controls.
⑦Stack Bypass Tray
Feeds non-standard size or thick/thin type paper
stacks.
⑧Stack Bypass Tray Extension
Pull out to load paper stack.
⑨Slide Guides for Stack Bypass Tray
Adjusts to the width of the paper.
⑩Paper Stopper
Prevents the paper from falling o the paper
delivery tray.
Open the stopper from its original position for
LTR/A4 size paper. For LGL size paper, pull out the
extension rst, and then open the stopper.
⑪Paper Delivery Tray
Copies, prints and faxes are output to the paper
delivery tray.
⑫Main Power Switch
Press to the “I” side to turn the power ON.
⑬USB Port
Connect the USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable.
⑭Ethernet Port
Connect the network cable.
⑮External Device Jack
Connect an external device.
⑯Telephone Line Jack
Connect the external telephone cable.
⑰Paper Drawer
Holds up to 250 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m2)).
⑱Optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1
Holds the additional paper supply. Up to 500
sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m2)) can be held.
Before Using the Machine
1-4
Machine Components
External View (Back)
⑲Back Cover
Open this cover to clear paper jams.
⑳Power Socket
Connect the power cord.
Before Using the Machine
1-5
Machine Components
Internal View
㉑Scanning Area
Originals placed in the feeder are scanned here.
㉒Platen Glass
Place originals here when scanning books, thick
originals, thin originals, transparencies, etc.
㉓Toner Cartridges
When toner runs out, pull out the empty toner
cartridges, and replace them with new ones.
㉔Delivery Feeder Unit (Electrostatic Transfer Belt)
Transfers toner to paper. Do not place any objects
on or touch the transfer belt. Doing so
deteriorates print quality.
㉕Front Cover
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridges or
to clear paper jams.
㉖Duplex Unit
The duplex unit enables you to use the 2-Sided
mode for copying or printing.
㉗Fixing Unit
The xing unit xes the toner to the paper. The
parts inside the xing unit are subject to high
temperatures. When removing jammed paper,
take care not to touch anything in this area.
Before Using the Machine
1-6
Control Panel
Control Panel
This section describes the names and functions of the keys on the control panel.
Main Control Panel
①[Power] switch (Sub Power Supply)
Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When
the control panel is turned OFF, the machine is in
the Sleep mode.
②Numeric keys
Use to enter alphanumeric characters.
③[Clear] key
Press to clear entered values or characters.
④[Log In/Out] key
Press to enter the Security mode.
⑤Volume Control Dial
Move to adjust the line volume.
⑥[Stop] key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as a scan or
copy job.
⑦Main Power Indicator
Lights when the main power is turned ON.
⑧Error Indicator
Blinks or lights up if there is an error with the
machine. When the Error indicator ashes, follow
the instructions that appear on the display. When
the Error indicator maintains a steady red light,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
⑨[Start] key
Press to start an operation.
⑩Processing/Data Indicator
Blinks or lights up green when the machine is
performing operations. When the Processing/
Data indicator maintains a steady green light, a
job is waiting or a document has been received in
memory.
Before Using the Machine
1-7
Control Panel
⑪[Reset] key
Press to restore the current settings to the
Standard mode.
⑫[OK] key
Press to conrm the settings and proceed to the
next screen.
⑬Scroll Wheel
Turn left and right to select menu items or setting
items.
⑭[▼], [▲], [◀], [▶] keys
Press to move the cursor position.
⑮[Back] key
Press to return to the previous screen.
⑯Any key
Press to select the setting item displayed on the
bottom of the display.
⑰[Status Monitor/Cancel] key
Press to display the System Monitor screen. The
System Monitor screen enables you to check the
status and log of Copy, Send, Fax, and Print jobs
and cancel the ongoing jobs. The status of device
or consumable can also be checked.
⑱Display
The settings screen for each function is shown on
this display. Some settings screens may have
several pages. (See ”Display Parts and Functions,”
on p. 1-11.)
⑲Custom Key 2
You can assign the desired function for this key.
For details, see “Registering the Custom Keys” on
p. 1-8.
⑳Custom Key 1
You can assign the desired function for this key.
For details, see “Registering the Custom Keys” on
p. 1-8.
㉑[Main Menu] key
Press to display the setting menu. Press to return
to the Main Menu screen when you are on the
mode screen.
Before Using the Machine
1-8
Control Panel
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Custom Key Registration>, then press
[OK].
Registering the Custom Keys
You can assign frequently used functions to two custom keys located on the left of the display.
The default settings are as follows:
<Key 1>: Copy
<Key 2>: Store on Memory Media*
* The default setting for the Color imageCLASS MF8450c is <Send/Fax>.
After registering the custom keys, attach the supplied customize labels onto the control panel.
If there is no label applicable to the function you register for the custom key, ll in the blank label and attach it.
–
–
–
–
Before Using the Machine
1-9
Control Panel
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Key 1> or <Key 2>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the function you want to assign, then
press [OK].
You can select from <Copy>, <Send/Fax>,
<Fax>, <E-mail>, <I-Fax>, <File Server>, <Send
Log>, <Address Book>*1, <Favorites>, <One-
touch>, <Scan to Store>, <Store on Memory
Media>, <Remote Scan>, and <Direct Print>*1.
*1 Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c/
MF9150c.
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Before Using the Machine
1-10
Control Panel
Left Side of the Control Panel
Color imageCLASS
MF9170c/MF9150c
Color imageCLASS
MF8450c
㉒SD/MS Card Slot
Insert an SD/MS Card when using the Direct Print
function.
㉓CF Card Slot
Insert a CF Card when using the Direct Print
function.
When two dierent types of cards are inserted, the machine
only recognizes the one that was inserted rst.
Right Side of the Control Panel
㉔[Power] switch (Sub Power Supply)
㉕USB Slot
Insert USB devices when scanning documents to
a memory medium.
㉖Volume Control Dial
Before Using the Machine
1-11
Display Parts and Functions
Display Parts and Functions
The settings screen for each function is shown on the display on the control panel. For
details about each setting, refer to the pages on corresponding function. For instructions
on how to display each screen, refer to “Main Control Panel,” on p. 1-6.
Depending on the number of destinations registered, after the main power switch is turned ON, you may not be able to
perform operations using the control panel when the main menu screen appears. If this happens, wait until the machine
responses to the key operations.
Depending on your needs, you can change the main menu screen which appears when the main power switch is turned
ON. For details, “Setting the Initial Function,” in the e-Manual.
If the Auto Clear function is activated, the display returns to the main menu screen.
Log in mode is displayed only when Department/User ID Management is set to <ON> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. For details
on the system settings, see “Security,” in the e-Manual.
A scroll bar displayed on the right side on the screen indicates that there are more items. Use [▼],[▲] or to display the
next screen.
Depending on the system conguration and product purchased, some functions may not be available.
–
–
–
–
–
–
Main Menu Screen
Color imageCLASS MF9170c/9150c
Color imageCLASS MF8450c
①Copy
Displays the Copy Top screen. (See ”Copy Top
Screen,” on p. 1-12.)
●
●
②Send/Fax
Displays the Send Type Selection screen. (See
”Send Type Selection Screen,” on p. 1-13.)
③Scan to Store
Displays the Store Type Selection screen. (See
”Store Type Selection Screen,” on p. 1-14.)
④ Direct Print (Color imageCLASS MF9170c/9150c
only)
Displays the Select Memory Media screen. (See
“Select Memory Media Screen (Color imageCLASS
MF9170c/9150c Only),” on p. 1-14.)
⑤Additional Func. (Select with the right Any key)
On the Additional Functions screen, you can
adjust the machine settings to customize the way
the machine works. (See “Machine Settings,” on
p. 13-2.)
⑥Device Info. (Select with the left Any key)
On the Device Information screen, you can check
the current machine status and the copy, scan,
and print page counts. (See “Checking the Device
Information,” on p. 1-18.)
Before Using the Machine
1-12
Display Parts and Functions
Copy Top Screen
①Selected item and its description
Shows the highlighted item and its description.
②Current Setting
Lists the current settings.
③Scroll Bar
Indicates that more items can be viewed using
[▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel).
④Quantity
Displays the copy quantity.
⑤Paper Supply
Displays the selected paper.
⑥Copy Ratio
Displays the copy ratio.
①Color Mode Settings
Sets the color mode (color or black and white).
②Paper Source Settings
Selects the paper source.
③Density/Background Removal Settings
Sets the density.
④2-Sided Settings
Sets 2-sided copying.
⑤Preview Img.
You can conrm the current standard settings.
(See ”Checking Current Settings,” on p. 4-60.)
⑥Mode Memory (Select with the left Any key)
You can store and recall frequently used copy
settings and recall them. (See ”Frequently Used
Settings (Mode Memory),” on p. 4-61.)
⑦Copy Ratio Settings
Enlarges or reduces the copy size.
⑧Original Image Quality Settings
Sets the image quality of the original.
⑨N on 1 Settings
Reduces the size of multiple originals to t on
one sheet of paper.
⑩Sharpness Settings
Sets the sharpness of the image.
Before Using the Machine
1-13
Display Parts and Functions
⑪Frame Erase Settings
Erases shadows and lines that appear when using
various types of originals.
⑫Color Balance
Adjusts color balance depending on the color of
the originals.
⑬Collate Settings
Sorts copies into sets arranged in page order.
⑭Copies
Sets the number of copies.
⑮Standard Settings
Changes the Standard mode.
⑯Back
Select this item to return to the previous screen.
Send Type Selection Screen
①Address Book
Displays the Address Book screen. (See Chapter 3,
“Registering Destinations in the Address Book”.)
②New Fax Entry
Enter a fax number using the numeric keys. (See
“Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.)
③New E-mail Entry
Displays the E-mail address entry screen. (See
Chapter 6, “E-mail”.)
④New I-Fax Entry
Displays the I-Fax address entry screen. (See
“Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes,” on p. 5-25.)
⑤New File Server Entry
Displays the le server address entry screen. (See
”Scan to File Server,” in the e-Manual.)
⑥Specify from Log
Select a destination from the last three
destinations. (See Chapter 5, “Fax,” and Chapter 6,
“E-mail”.)
⑦Back
Select this item to return to the previous screen.
Before Using the Machine
1-14
Display Parts and Functions
Store Type Selection Screen
①Store on File Server
Stores the scanned originals on the specied le
server. (See ”Scan to File Server,” in the e-Manual.)
②Store on Memory Media
Stores the scanned originals in the memory
media. (See ”Scanning Documents to a File
Server,” in the e-Manual.)
③Remote Scan
Enables to use the Network Scan function. (See
”Network Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
④Back
Select this item to return to the previous screen.
Select Memory Media Screen (Color
imageCLASS MF9170c/9150c Only)
For details about the Select Memory Media Screen,
see “Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print),” on
p. 7-11.
Insert a memory media, select a media, then press
[OK].
Log In Mode
If the Department ID Management or User ID
Management is set, the Log In screen is displayed.
For information on the Department ID Management
or User ID Management, see “Security,” in the e-
Manual.
For Department ID Management
Press [OK], enter the Department ID and password,
then press (Log In/Out).
For User ID Management
Press [OK], enter the User ID and password, then
press (Log In/Out).
Make sure to press (Log In/Out) after using the machine
when the Department ID/User ID Management is set.
●
●
Before Using the Machine
1-15
Toner Cartridge
Toner Cartridges
The lifetime of the Canon genuine toner cartridges used in this machine (Color imageCLASS
MF9170c / Color imageCLASS MF9150c) is approximately 6000 pages for K (Black) and is
approximately 6000 pages for each C (Cyan), M (Magenta) and Y (Yellow). The lifetime of the
Canon genuine toner cartridges used in this machine (Color imageCLASS MF8450c) is
approximately 6000 pages for K (Black) and is approximately 4000 pages for each C (Cyan),
M (Magenta) and Y (Yellow). The page counts are based on 5% coverage* when printing A4
size paper with the default print density setting. The level of toner consumption varies
depending on the type of originals printed. If your average original contains a lot of
graphics, tables, or charts, the life of the toner cartridge will be shorter as they consume
more toner. When you are replacing a toner cartridge, be sure to use a toner cartridge
designed for this product. To purchase the Canon genuine replacement toner cartridge,
contact your local Canon dealer or CanonCustomerCareCenter(1-800-828-4040).
* The term “5% coverage” denotes a document on which the area covered with toner is 5% of the total area of a sheet.
For the Color imageCLASS MF9170c/MF9150c
Toner Cartridge name:
Canon Cartridge 111
K/C/M/Y
For the Color imageCLASS MF8450c
Toner Cartridge name:
Canon Cartridge 117
K/C/M/Y
Model Name Supported Canon
Genuine Cartridge Print Yield
Color imageCLASS MF9170c
Color imageCLASS MF9150c
Cartridge 111 Black
Cartridge 111 Magenta
Cartridge 111 Yellow
Cartridge 111 Cyan
Approx. 6,000 pages
Color imageCLASS MF8450c
Cartridge 117 Black Approx. 6,000 pages
Cartridge 117 Magenta
Cartridge 117 Yellow
Cartridge 117 Cyan
Approx. 4,000 pages
●
●
Before Using the Machine
1-16
Toner Cartridge
Maintaining the Toner Cartridges
Note the following when handling toner cartridges.
Do not place the toner cartridges in re. Toner powder is ammable.
If there is a toner powder leakage, make sure not to inhale or touch the toner powder. If it comes in contact with your skin, rinse with
cold water using soap. If you feel an irritation on your skin or inhale the powder, consult a doctor immediately.
When removing the toner cartridges from the machine, make sure to remove them carefully. If not removed with care, the toner
powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor
immediately.
Keep the toner cartridges away from small children. If they ingest the toner powder, consult a doctor immediately.
Do not disassemble the toner cartridges. The toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth. If this
happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately.
Keep the toner cartridges away from computer screens, disk drives, and oppy disks. The magnets inside the toner cartridges may
harm these items.
Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity, or rapid changes in temperature.
Do not expose the toner cartridges to direct sunlight or bright light for more than ve minutes.
Store the toner cartridges in their protective bags. Do not open the bags until you are ready to install the toner cartridges in the
machine.
Save the protective toner cartridge bags in case you need to repack and transport the toner cartridges at a later date.
Do not store the toner cartridges in a salty atmosphere or where there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol sprays.
Do not remove the toner cartridges from the machine unnecessarily.
Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridges. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light
or is damaged.
Always hold the toner cartridges by their handles to avoid touching the drum protective shutter.
Do not place the toner cartridges in an upright or an upside down position. If toner becomes caked in the toner cartridges, it may
become impossible to free it even by shaking the toner cartridges.
Be careful of counterfeits
It has been conrmed that there are counterfeit Canon toner in the marketplace. Using a counterfeit toner may cause poor print
quality or poor printer performance. Please be advised that Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident, or damage
caused by using non-genuine toner, including counterfeits.
For details, see the following website.
canon.com/counterfeit
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
•
•
Before Using the Machine
1-17
Toner Cartridge
Checking the Toner Level
The Device Info. screen indicates one of three levels for the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges.
If the toner gauge indicates that the toner is empty, it is recommended that the toner cartridges be replaced.
(See “Replacing the Toner Cartridges,” on p. 11-7.)
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the left Any key to select <Device
Info.>.
The screen below indicates there is sucient
toner in the toner cartridge.
The screen below indicates that only a small
amount of toner remaining inside the
machine, You can continue printing. Proceed
to step 4.
–
–
It is recommended that you purchase a new toner
cartridge to have it available when needed.
The screen below indicates the toner
cartridge is running out of toner.
3
Press the right Any key to select
<Recovery Steps> and follow the
instructions on the display to replace the
toner cartridge.
4
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
Before Using the Machine
1-18
Checking the Device Information
Checking the Device Information
On the Device Information screen you can check the current machine status.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the left Any key to select <Device
Info.>.
① Toner
The status of toner is displayed.
② Available Memory
The remaining amount of available system
memory is displayed in percentage.
③ Paper Information
The paper supply, and the paper type,
paper size loaded in the paper drawer(s)*
are displayed.
* The paper drawer 2 is displayed only
when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper
Drawer 2) is attached.
3
Press (Main Menu) return to the
Main Menu screen.
You can also return to the Main Menu screen by
pressing [OK].
Before Using the Machine
1-19
Entering Characters
Entering Characters
For screens that require alphanumeric entries, follow the procedure below to enter
characters.
Use [◀], [▶], or (Scroll Wheel) to move the
cursor position left or right.
Use [▼] and [▲] to move the cursor position up
and down.
Press [OK] to enter the highlighted character or
space and to determine the entry mode.
Press [◀], [▶], [▼], [▲], or (Scroll Wheel) to
change the entry mode, then press [OK].
<A/1>: Alphanumeric character entry mode
<Sym>: Symbol entry mode
●
●
●
●
–
–
Select <Backspace> by pressing the left Any key
to clear the entered characters one by one.
Select <Set> by pressing the right Any key to
complete the entry and return to the previous
screen.
You can also use – (numeric keys) to enter numbers.
●
●
Before Using the Machine
1-20
Telephone Line Setting
Telephone Line Setting
The machine is set to automatic detection mode. With some environments and telephone
lines, the machine may not detect the proper telephone line type. If this happens, follow the
procedure below to set the telephone line type. The default setting is <Auto>.
Connect the telephone line cable before turning ON the machine, if you use the automatic detection mode.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<User Settings>, then press [OK].
Before Using the Machine
1-21
Telephone Line Setting
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Tel. Line Type Selection>, then press
[OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Manual>, then press [OK].
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the type of telephone line that is
connected to the machine, then press
[OK].
<Pulse>: Pulse dialing
<Tone>: Tone dialing
Be sure to check the type of telephone line you
are using and make the correct setting. If this
setting is incorrect, you will not be able to
communicate with other machines.
9
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Before Using the Machine
1-22
Timer Settings
Timer Settings
Setting the Sleep Mode
When the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, it automatically enters the Sleep mode.
The default settings are <On> and <15 Minutes.>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Auto Sleep Time>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to set
the desired interval, then press [OK].
You can set the interval using – (numeric
keys).
Before Using the Machine
1-23
Timer Settings
Setting Auto Clear Time
If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, the display returns to the standby mode (Auto Clear
function).
The default setting is <2 Minutes>.
If <0> is selected, the Auto Clear mode is not set.
After the Auto Clear mode initiates, the display returns to the screen specied in <Auto Clear Settings> in <Common Settings>. For
details, see “Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates,” in the e-Manual.
–
–
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
To enter the Sleep mode manually, press
[Power] on the operation panel.
The machine will not enter the Sleep mode
when:
the machine is in operation
the Processing/Data indicator is lit or ashing
a message is on the display and the Error
indicator is ashing
there is a paper jam in the machine
the handset of the external telephone is o
the hook
–
–
•
•
•
•
•
The machine will leave the Sleep mode when:
you press [Power] on the operation panel
a fax is received
the handset of the external telephone is o
the hook
a print job is sent from a computer, and the
print is started
a computer performs a scan through the
machine
–
•
•
•
•
•
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
Before Using the Machine
1-24
Timer Settings
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Auto Clear Time>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲], (Scroll Wheel), or
numeric keys to set the desired interval ,
then press [OK].
You can set the interval from 0 (o) to 9
minutes (in one-minute increments).
You can also set the interval using –
(numeric keys).
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Setting the Daylight Saving Time
In some countries or areas, time is advanced throughout the summer season. This is called “Daylight Saving
Time.”
The default setting is <On>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
Before Using the Machine
1-25
Timer Settings
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Date/Time Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Daylight Saving Time Set.>, then press
[OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Month>, then press [OK].
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the month when the daylight saving time
starts, then press [OK].
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Week>, then press [OK].
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
select the week, then press [OK].
11
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Day of the Week>, then press [OK].
Before Using the Machine
1-26
Timer Settings
12
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the day of the Week, then press [OK].
13
Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
The End Date Month to End DST screen appears.
14
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Month>, then press [OK].
15
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the month when the daylight saving time
ends, then press [OK].
16
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Week>, then press [OK].
17
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the week, then press [OK].
18
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Day of the Week>, then press [OK].
Before Using the Machine
1-27
Timer Settings
19
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the day of the Week, then press [OK].
20
Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
21
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Before Using the Machine
1-28
Timer Settings
2-1
Originals and Print Media
This chapter describes the types of paper and originals that can be used with the machine and how to load paper
into the stack bypass tray.
Originals Requirements ..............................................2-2
Scanning Area ..............................................................2-3
Placing Originals ..........................................................2-4
On the Platen Glass .............................................................2-4
In the Feeder .........................................................................2-5
Paper Requirements ....................................................2-7
Printable Area ..............................................................2-9
Loading Paper ............................................................2-10
In the Paper Drawer ......................................................... 2-10
In the Stack Bypass Tray .................................................. 2-15
Setting Paper Size and Type .....................................2-20
For the Stack Bypass Tray ...............................................2-20
For the Paper Drawer ....................................................... 2-22
Relationship between Original Orientation and
Preprinted Paper Output Chart ................................2-24
Originals and
Print Media Chapter
2
2-2
Originals Requirements
Originals and Print Media
Originals Requirements
Available original type, size, weight and quantity are shown in the table below.
Platen Glass Feeder
Type Sheet*1, book, three-dimensional objects Sheet
Size (W × L) Max. 8 1/2" × 14"
(Max. 215.9 mm × 355.6 mm)
Max. 14" × 8.5" (355.6 mm × 215.9 mm)*2
Min. 5" × 5.5" (128 mm × 139.7 mm)*2
Weight Max. 4.4 lb (2 kg) One-sided scanning (1 page): 13 to 34 lb (50 to
128 g/m2)*3
One-sided scanning (more than 2 pages): 13 to 28 lb
(50 to 105 g/m2)*4
Two-sided scanning: 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m2)
Quantity 1 sheet Max. 50 sheets*5
(Max. 30 sheets for LGL originals)
*1 When copying transparent originals such as tracing paper or transparencies, use a piece of plain white paper to cover the
original after placing it face-down on the platen glass.
*2 When copying two-sided originals, only LTR, LGL, FLSC, A4 can be used.
*3 17 to 34 lb (64 to 128 g/m2) for paper smaller than LTR/A4.
*4 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m2) for paper smaller than LTR/A4.
*5 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper
Do not place the originals on the platen glass or in the feeder until the glue, ink or correction fluid on the
originals are completely dry.
Remove all fasteners (staples, paper clips, etc.) before loading the originals in the feeder.
To prevent original jams in the feeder, do not use any of the following:
Wrinkled or creased paper
Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper
Curled or rolled paper
Coated paper
Torn paper
Onion skin or thin paper
Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer
Transparencies
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2-3
Scanning Area
Originals and Print Media
Scanning Area
Make sure your originals' text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the following
diagram. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight
variations in actual use.
Copy Scanning Area
Fax Scanning Area
●
●
2-4
Placing Originals
Originals and Print Media
Placing Originals
Place your originals on the platen glass or into the feeder, depending on the size and type
of the original, and the copy modes that you want to use.
On the Platen Glass
Place the originals on the platen glass when copying bound originals (such as books and magazines), heavy or
lightweight originals, and transparencies.
1
Lift up the feeder.
2
Place your original face down.
3
Align the original with the appropriate
paper size marks.
If your original does not match any of the paper
size marks, align the center of your original with
the arrow mark.
2-5
Placing Originals
Originals and Print Media
4
Gently close the feeder.
The original is ready for scanning.
When closing the feeder, be careful not to get
your ngers caught, as this may result in
personal injury.
Do not press down the feeder forcefully, as this
may damage the platen glass and cause
personal injury.
–
–
Remove the original from the platen glass when
scanning is complete.
In the Feeder
Place the originals into the feeder when you want to copy several originals at the same time, and press
(Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals to the scanning area and scans them.
1
Fan the originals stack and even the
edges.
2
Adjust the slide guides to the width of the
originals.
2-6
Placing Originals
Originals and Print Media
3
Neatly place the originals face up in the
original supply tray.
The originals are ready for scanning.
Do not add or remove originals while they are
being scanned.
When scanning is complete, remove the
originals from the originals delivery tray to
avoid paper jams.
Avoid using feeder to scan the same originals
more than 30 times. When scanned repeatedly,
originals can become folded or torn, which
may cause paper jams.
If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning
originals written in pencil, clean them. (See
“Cleaning the Machine,” on p. 11-2.)
–
–
–
–
2-7
Paper Requirements
Originals and Print Media
Paper Requirements
The paper size and types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following
table.
Paper drawer(s) Stack bypass tray
Size (W × L) Legal*9, Letter*9, Officio, M-Officio,
B-Offficio, Executive, Foolscap*9,
A4*9, B5, A5
3" × 5" to Legal (8 1/2" × 14") (76.2
× 127 to 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm)
(Always set vertically.)
Weight 16 to 32 lb
(60 to 120 g/m2)
16 to 47 lb
(60 to 176 g/m2)
Quantity Max. 250 sheets *1 *8Max. 100 sheets *1
Type Plain *2*9○ ○
Plain H *3*9○ ○
Color *2*9○ ○
Recycled *2*9○ ○
Heavy 1 *4*9○ ○
Heavy 2 *5—○
Bond *6*9○ ○
Transparency *7—○
Labels — ○
Envelopes — ○
Rough *9○ ○
(○: available —: not available)
*1 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper
*2 From 19 to 24 lb (70 to 90 g/m2)
*3 From 20 to 28 lb (75 to 105 g/m2)
*4 From 28 to 32 lb (106 to 120 g/m2)
*5 From 32 to 47 lb (121 to 176 g/m2)
*6 20 lb (75 g/m2)
*7 Use only LTR transparencies made especially for this machine.
*8 Max. 500 sheets of paper can be set in the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2).
*9 Can be used for two-sided copying.
The default paper size is LTR. If you use a dierent paper size, you must change the paper size settings. (See “Setting Paper Size and Type,”
on p. 2-20.)
2-8
Paper Requirements
Originals and Print Media
To prevent paper jams, do not use any of the following:
Wrinkled or creased paper
Curled or rolled paper
Coated paper
Torn paper
Damp paper
Very thin paper
Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the reverse side.)
The following types of paper do not print well:
Highly textured paper
Very smooth paper
Shiny paper
Make sure the paper is free from dust, lint, and oil stains.
Be sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities.
Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready for use. Keep opened packs in their original
packaging in a cool, dry location.
Store paper at 64.4°F–75.2°F (18°C–24°C), 40%–60% relative humidity.
Use only the transparencies designed for laser printers. Canon recommends you to use Canon type
transparencies with this machine.
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
2-9
Printable Area
Originals and Print Media
Printable Area
The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper. Note that the
margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.
2-10
Loading Paper
Originals and Print Media
Loading Paper
This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawers and stack bypass tray.
In the Paper Drawer
This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawer or in the optional paper drawer.
1
Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
2
Hold the paper drawer with both hands
and remove it from the machine.
Make sure to take the paper drawer out of the
machine before loading paper. If paper is loaded
while the paper drawer is partially pulled out, the
paper drawer may fall, resulting in damage to the
machine or personal injury.
3
Hold the lock release lever of the side
paper guides (A) and slide the guides to
the mark for the size of the paper to be
loaded. The side paper guides move
together.
Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the
size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the
guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause
paper jams, dirty prints, etc.
2-11
Loading Paper
Originals and Print Media
4
Hold the lock release lever of the rear
paper guides (A) and slide the guides to
the mark for the size of the paper to be
loaded.
Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the
size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the
guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause
paper jams, dirty prints, etc.
5
Fan the paper stack and even the edges.
6
Load the paper stack of the appropriate
size with the print side facing up. Align
the rear edge of the paper stack with the
rear paper guide.
When loading paper, be careful not to cut your
ngers on the edges of the paper.
Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the
load limit mark (A).
The paper drawer holds approximately 250
sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m2)).
–
–
–
2-12
Loading Paper
Originals and Print Media
7
Hold the paper drawer with both hands
and set it back into the machine.
8
Push the paper drawer as far as it will go.
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
For details on loading paper in the stack bypass
tray, see “In the Stack Bypass Tray,” on p. 2-15.
–
–
In the Optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2)
When the optional drawer is installed in the machine, follow the procedure described below.
●
1
Pull out the optional paper drawer until it
stops.
2
Hold the optional paper drawer with both
hands and remove it from the machine.
Make sure to take the optional paper drawer out
of the printer before loading paper. If paper is
loaded while the optional paper drawer is partially
pulled out, the optional paper drawer may fall,
resulting in damage to the machine or personal
injury.
2-13
Loading Paper
Originals and Print Media
3
Hold the lock release lever of the side
paper guides (A) and slide the guides to
the mark for the size of the paper to be
loaded. The side paper guides move
together.
Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the
size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the
guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause
paper jams, dirty prints, etc.
4
Hold the lock release lever of the rear
paper guides (A) and slide the guides to
the mark for the size of the paper to be
loaded.
Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the
size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the
guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause
paper jams, dirty prints, etc.
5
Fan the paper stack and even the edges.
2-14
Loading Paper
Originals and Print Media
6
Load the paper stack of the appropriate
size with the print side facing up. Align
the rear edge of paper stack with the rear
paper guide.
When loading paper, be careful not to cut your
ngers on the edges of the paper.
Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the
load limit mark (A).
The optional paper drawer holds approximately
500 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m2)).
–
–
–
7
Hold the optional paper drawer with both
hands and set it back into the machine.
8
Push the paper drawer as far as it will go.
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
For details on loading paper in the stack bypass
tray, see “In the Stack Bypass Tray,” on p. 2-15.
–
–
2-15
Loading Paper
Originals and Print Media
In the Stack Bypass Tray
If you are making prints on transparencies, labels, nonstandard-sized paper, or envelopes, load them into the
stack bypass tray.
Note the following points when using the stack bypass tray:
Paper Quantity: one to approximately 100 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2),)
Paper Size: 3" x 5" to 8 1/2" x 14" (76.2 × 127 mm to 216 × 356 mm )
Paper Weight: 16 to 47 lb (60 to 176 g/m2)
Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use, to allow the paper to feed smoothly through the stack
bypass tray (allowable curl amount: less than 3/8" (10 mm) for normal paper, less than 1/4" (5 mm) for heavyweight paper).
Depending on the paper storage conditions, it may not be possible to feed some paper into the stack bypass tray. In this case, set
the amount of paper to less than 50 sheets 20 lb (75 g/m2).
Do not load dierent size/type paper at the same time.
If you load multiple sheets of heavyweight paper into the stack bypass tray, a paper jam may occur depending on the type of
heavyweight paper. If this happens, load only one sheet of heavyweight paper at a time.
When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies, make sure to correctly set the paper type,
especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely aect the quality of the
image. Moreover, the xing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.
If you are printing on envelopes, do not allow more than 10 envelopes to accumulate in the output tray. Always empty the output
tray once 10 envelopes have accumulated.
If you select <Custom Size> for copying, you cannot use the 1-Sided to 2-Sided, 2-Sided to 2-Sided, Frame Erase, or Image
Combination mode. (See “Copy,” in the e-Manual.)
If you select <COM 10>, <Monarch>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5> for copying or printing, you cannot use the Collate, 1-Sided to 2-
Sided, 2-Sided to 2-Sided, Frame Erase, or N on 1 mode. (See “Copy,” in the e-Manual.)
Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.
For high quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
For more information on paper types that can be used with this machine, see “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
–
•
•
•
•
•
–
–
–
–
–
–
•
•
•
2-16
Loading Paper
Originals and Print Media
1
Open the stack bypass tray.
If the paper size you are going to load into the
stack bypass tray is dierent from the paper size
stored in stack bypass tray Standard Settings, set
stack bypass tray Standard Settings to ‘O’ in
Common Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See “Setting Paper Size and Type,” on
p. 2-20.)
2
Adjust the slide guides to match the size
of the paper.
If you are feeding large size paper, pull out the
auxiliary tray, and extend the tray extension.
3
Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.
Insert the paper stack as far as it will go.
When you print on paper which has logos or
patterns already printed on it), see
“Relationship between Original Orientation
and Preprinted Paper Output Chart,” on p. 2-
24.
■ Before inserting paper
① When you use the stack bypass tray to
make copies, straighten out curled paper
prior to use, as shown below. Curled paper
may cause a paper jam.
② If there is diculty in straightening out
curled paper, curl the front edges of the
paper upward, as shown below.
–
–
2-17
Loading Paper
Originals and Print Media
■ To print on the back side of preprinted
paper
① Load the preprinted paper face up into the
stack bypass tray, as shown in the
illustration below.
The screen for selecting the paper size appears.
When loading paper into the stack bypass tray,
align the paper stack neatly between the slide
guides. If the paper is not loaded correctly, a
paper jam may occur.
If you are printing on heavyweight paper or
envelopes using the stack bypass tray, and nd
that the paper or envelopes are not being fed
smoothly or evenly through the stack bypass
tray, remove the paper or envelopes, curl the
feeding edges upward approximately 1/8"
(3 mm), and then reload the paper or
envelopes. Curling the feeding edges enables
the rollers to grip the paper or envelopes as
they are fed into the machine from the stack
bypass tray.
If there are instructions on the paper package
about which side of the paper to load, follow
those instructions.
When the paper is loaded into the stack bypass
tray, the side facing down is the one printed on.
If problems, such as poor print quality or paper
jams occur, try turning the paper stack over
and reload it.
–
–
–
–
–
2-18
Loading Paper
Originals and Print Media
■ If you are loading envelopes into the stack
bypass tray:
① Take ve envelopes, loosen them as shown,
and then stack them together.
Repeat this step ve times for each set of
ve envelopes.
② Place the envelopes on a clean, level
surface, and press all the way around the
envelopes by hand, in the direction of the
arrows, to remove any curls. Repeat this
step ve times for each set of ve
envelopes.
Take particular care to spread the envelopes out
in the direction that they will be fed.
③ Hold down the four corners of the
envelopes rmly, so that they and the
sealed or glued portion stay at.
Do not print on the back side of the envelopes
(the side with the ap).
If the envelopes become lled with air, atten
them by hand before loading them into the
stack bypass tray.
–
–
2-19
Loading Paper
Originals and Print Media
Load the envelopes, as shown below.
The screen for selecting the paper size appears.
The stack bypass tray can hold 10 envelopes at
a time.
Envelopes may be creased in the printing
process.
–
–
2-20
Setting Paper Size and Type
Originals and Print Media
Setting Paper Size and Type
This section describes how to set paper size and type loaded into the paper drawer(s) and
stack bypass tray.
For the Stack Bypass Tray
You can register a frequently used paper size and type for the stack bypass tray.
The default setting is <O>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Paper Settings>, then press [OK].
2-21
Setting Paper Size and Type
Originals and Print Media
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press the right Any key to
select <Option>.
If you do not want to set the stack bypass
standard settings, select <O>, then press [OK],
and press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
paper size, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper sizes:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <STMT>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>,
<OFI>, <B-OFI>, <M-OFI>, <G-LTRR>, <G-
LGL>, <Custom Size>, <COM 10>,
<Monarch>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5>
If you use A/B size paper, press the right Any
key to select <A/B Sizes> and select the paper
size you want to use.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
paper type, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain>, <Plain H>, <Recycled Paper>, <Color>,
<Bond>, <Heavy 1>, <Heavy 2>,
<Transparencies>, <Labels>, <Rough>
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
2-22
Setting Paper Size and Type
Originals and Print Media
For the Paper Drawer
When you place other sizes and/or types of paper, follow this procedure to change the settings.
The default settings are <LTR> and <PLAIN PAPER>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Paper Settings>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Drawer 1> or <Drawer 2>*, then press
[OK].
* Only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper
Drawer 2) is attached.
2-23
Setting Paper Size and Type
Originals and Print Media
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
paper size, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper sizes:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>, <OFI>, <B-
OFI>, <M-OFI>
If you use A/B size paper, press the right Any
key to select <A/B Sizes> and perform the
step above.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
paper type, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain>, <Plain H>, <Recycled Paper>,
<Color>, <Bond>, <Heavy 1>, <Rough>
If you use the paper drawer 2*, repeat the
steps 4 to 6 for the paper drawer 2*.
* Only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper
Drawer 2) is attached.
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
–
–
–
2-24
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
Originals and Print Media
Relationship between Original Orientation
and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
Please use this chart when printing on preprinted paper (i.e., paper with logos).
If you want to copy on the back side of preprinted paper, place the side you want to copy on:
face up when using a paper drawer
face down when using the stack bypass tray
Output Example
LTR LTRR
Preprinted
Paper
Orientation in paper
drawer
Preprinted side: Face up
Orientation in stack
bypass tray
Preprinted side: Face
down
Original Orientation on the platen
glass
Original side: Face down
Orientation in the feeder
Original side: Face up
–
–
Storing/Editing Address Book
This chapter describes how to register destinations in the Address Book, and how to edit and erase registered
information.
Registering
Destinations in
the Address Book
Chapter
3
Storing/Editing Address Book ....................................3-2
Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book .........3-2
Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address
Book ..........................................................................................3-7
Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address
Book ....................................................................................... 3-10
Registering File Server Addresses in the Address
Book ....................................................................................... 3-12
Registering Group Addresses in the Address
Book ....................................................................................... 3-18
Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in the
Address Book......................................................................3-21
Erasing Addresses from the Address Book .............. 3-24
Storing/Editing One-Touch .......................................3-26
Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch ...................3-26
Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch ........... 3-31
Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch .............. 3-34
Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch ... 3-37
Registering Group Addresses in One-Touch ........... 3-44
Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in
One-Touch ........................................................................... 3-47
Erasing Addresses Registered in One-Touch .......... 3-50
3-2
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax
addresses, and le server addresses. You can also register multiple destinations for a group
address. Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the eort of entering that
destination’s address each time you send a job.
Storing addresses in the Address Book is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c/MF9150c.
You can register a total of 300 destinations in the Address Book, including 200 destinations registered in one-touch.
Each address entry is treated as a single entry, so if a destination is registered in a group address, that destination and the
group address are counted as two entries.
Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a le, which can be imported into the
machine. For information on how to export and import the Address Book, see “Setting from a PC,” in the e-Manual.
For easy reference, it is recommended to print the list of recipients registered in the Address Book and one-touch. For
information on how to print the lists, see “Report Settings,” on p. 13-19.
New destinations cannot be registered in the Address Book if <Limit New Destinations> in <Send Function Restriction> in
<System Management Set.> is set to <On>.
Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for registering fax numbers in the Address Book.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify from Address Book>, then press [OK].
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press <OK>.
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3-3
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
5
Press the right Any key to select <Register
New>.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
8
Use the software keyboard to enter the
recipient’s name.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the
recipient’s name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
–
–
3-4
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
9
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
11
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the fax
number.
You can enter up to 120 characters for fax
number.
If you want to move the position of the cursor,
use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel).
If you want to delete the number or character
immediately to the left of the cursor, use [▼],
[▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Backspace>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
If you want to insert a pause of several
seconds, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Pause>, then press [OK]. If you insert a
pause within the fax number, the letter <p> is
displayed between the numbers. If you insert
a pause at the end of the fax number, the
letter <P> appears. When dialing an overseas
number, insert a pause after the country code,
and at the end of the fax number.
If you want to directly call an extension line
that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch
Exchange), which accepts only tone signals,
use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Tone>, then press [OK].
If you want to insert a space between
numbers, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Space>, then press [OK].
If you want to delete the entire number you
entered, press (Clear).
For information on how to set the length of a
pause, see “Communications Settings,” on
p. 13-8.
For information on how to insert a pause for an
overseas number, see “Dialing an Overseas
Number (With Pauses),” on p. 5-22.
You cannot insert a pause or a space at the
beginning of a number.
If you enter a pause at the end of the number,
the pause is always 10 seconds long.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
3-5
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
12
If you want to set the ECM TX, sending
speed, and long distance settings, press
the right Any key to select <Option>.
These settings are optional. If you do not want
to set the optional settings, skip to step 20.
13
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<ECM TX>, then press [OK].
14
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On> or <O>, then press [OK].
15
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Sending Speed>, then press [OK].
16
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the sending speed, then press [OK].
If your document transmissions are slow to start,
it may mean that the telephone lines in your
area are in poor condition. Select a slower
speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400
bps>, <9600 bps>, or <4800 bps>.
17
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Long Distance>, then press [OK].
3-6
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
18
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the long distance setting, then press [OK].
Select <Domestic> for dialing domestic (local)
telephone numbers. Select <Long Distance (1)>
if communication errors frequently occur when
you make overseas calls (when the overseas
telephone number is registered in the Address
Book). If errors persist, try selecting <Long
Distance (2)> or <Long Distance (3)>.
19
Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
20
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Destination>, then press [OK].
21
Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
If you want to register another fax number,
repeat from step 6.
22
Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
23
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-7
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for registering e-mail addresses in the Address Book.
By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify from Address Book>, then press [OK].
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press <OK>.
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
–
–
•
•
•
•
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
5
Press the right Any key to select <Register
New>.
3-8
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<E-mail>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
8
Use the software keyboard to enter the
recipient’s name.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the
recipient’s name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
–
–
9
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
11
Use the software keyboard to enter the
recipient’s e-mail address.
You can enter up to 120 characters for the e-
mail address.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
–
–
3-9
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
12
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
13
Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
If you want to register another e-mail address,
repeat from step 6.
14
Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
15
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-10
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for registering I-fax addresses in the Address Book.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify from Address Book>, then press [OK].
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press <OK>.
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
5
Press the right Any key to select <Register
New>.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<I-Fax>, then press [OK].
3-11
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
8
Use the software keyboard to enter the
recipient’s name.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the
recipient’s name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
9
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
–
–
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
11
Use the software keyboard to enter the
recipient’s I-fax address.
You can enter up to 120 characters for the I-
fax address.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
12
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
–
–
3-12
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
13
Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
If you want to register another I-fax address,
repeat from step 6.
14
Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
15
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for registering le server addresses in the Address Book.
If <Language Switch> in Common Settings is set to <On>, the Host Name and File Path of the le server destination may not be
displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify from Address Book>, then press [OK].
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press <OK>.
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
–
–
•
•
•
•
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
3-13
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
5
Press the right Any key to select <Register
New>.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<File>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
8
Use the software keyboard to enter the
le server name.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the le
server name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
9
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
–
–
3-14
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
11
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
a server protocol, then press [OK].
<FTP>: Select this protocol if you are sending
documents to a computer running Sun Solaris
2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information
Services 5.0 on Windows 2000 Server, Internet
Information Services 5.1 on Windows XP
Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0
on Windows Server 2003, Internet Information
Services 7.0 on Windows Vista, or Red Hat
Linux 7.2.
<Windows (SMB)>: Select this protocol if you
are sending documents to a computer
running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later) or
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
<Windows (SMB): Browse>: Select this
protocol if you want to specify a le server
connected to a specic network.
After turning the main power on, you must wait
for the time set in the Startup Time Settings to
elapse before selecting <Windows (SMB):
Browse>. Network transmission is not possible
until this startup time has elapsed. (See “Network
Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
■ If you select <FTP> or <Windows (SMB)>:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Host Name>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
② Use the software keyboard to enter the host
name.
You can enter up to 120 characters for the
host name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
A host name is a unique name assigned to
identify each host computer that provides
services on the Internet. In this entry box, enter
the name of the le server on the network as the
destination of the send job.
③ If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
–
–
3-15
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
④ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Folder Path>, then press [OK].
⑤ Use the software keyboard to enter the
path to the folder.
You can enter up to 120 characters for the
folder path.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
A le path is a series of characters that signify
the location of the folder. Specify a folder in the
le server as the destination of the send job.
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, enter the folder name set in
imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS
MF9170c/9150c only).
–
–
–
–
⑥ If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
⑦ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<User Name>, then press [OK].
⑧ Use the software keyboard to enter the user
name.
You can enter up to 24 characters for the user
name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, enter the user name set in
imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS
MF9170c/9150c only).
–
–
3-16
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
⑨ If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
⑩ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Password>, then press [OK].
⑪ Use the software keyboard to enter the
password.
You can enter up to 24 characters when
<FTP> is selected as the server protocol, or up
to 14 when <Windows (SMB)> is selected.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, enter the password set in
imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS
MF9170c/9150c only).
–
–
⑫ If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
⑬ Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
⑭ Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
3-17
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
■ If you select <Windows (SMB): Browse>:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired workgroup, then press [OK].
If the desired workgroup is not displayed, use [▼],
[▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired
workgroup.
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired le server, then press [OK].
If the desired le server is not displayed, use [▼],
[▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired le
server.
③ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired le server, then press the right
Any key to select <Set>.
To enter the user name and the network
password, select a le server from the list and
press [OK]. Enter the user name (up to 24
character) and network password (up to 14
characters), then press the right Any key to select
<Set>.
④ Specify the folder path, user name, and
password as described from steps 5 to 11 in
“If you select <FTP> or <Windows (SMB)>.”
⑤ Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
3-18
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
⑥ Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
If you want to register another le server
address, repeat from step 6.
12
Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
13
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book
The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 299 stored destinations as a single
destination.
You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations need to be registered in the Address Book before you can
register them as part of a group address.
The types of destinations you can register in a group address are fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and le server
addresses. You cannot register a group address in a group address.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify from Address Book>, then press [OK].
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to Add. Book>, then press <OK>.
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6.
–
–
–
•
•
•
•
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
3-19
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
5
Press the right Any key to select <Register
New>.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Group>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
8
Use the software keyboard to enter the
group name.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the
group name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its name, in alphabetical order.
9
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
–
–
3-20
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
11
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the destination to store in the group
address, then press [OK].
To cancel a selected destination, select the
destination again and press [OK] to clear the
check mark.
Use [◀] or [▶] to select the index key (e.g.,
[ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries.
Select [All] to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, use
[▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the
desired destination.
You can select a destination and press the left
Any key to select <Details> to conrm the
detailed information related to the selected
destination. Press the right Any key to select
<Done> to return to the previous screen.
–
–
–
–
12
Repeat step 11 to select all destinations
you want to register in the group address,
then press the right Any key to select
<Set>.
13
Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
If you want to register another group address,
repeat from step 6.
14
Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
15
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-21
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for checking and editing the details of the destinations registered in the
Address Book.
This section describes how to check and edit the details of the destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also check
and edit the details from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify from Address Book>, then press [OK].
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to check or edit.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Conrm/Edit Address Book Dest.>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.
–
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
3-22
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the destination you want to check or edit,
then press the left Any key to select
<Edit/Erase>.
You cannot check or edit multiple destinations
at the same time.
Use [◀] or [▶] to select the index key (e.g.,
[ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries.
Select [All] to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, use
[▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the
desired destination.
If you select [All], destinations registered in
one-touch are also displayed. However, you
cannot edit those destinations. For information
on how to edit the destinations registered in
one-touch, see “Checking/Editing Addresses
Registered in One-Touch,” on p. 3-47.
–
–
–
–
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Conrm/Edit Address Book Dest.>, then
press [OK].
7
Check or edit the address details.
■ If you want to check the address details:
① Check the details, then press the right Any
key to select <Done>.
■ If you want to edit the address details:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the item you want to edit, then press [OK].
② Conrm that <Edit> is selected, then press
[OK].
3-23
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
③ Edit the address details.
Follow the same procedure as you used when
registering destinations.
For information on how to register fax
numbers, see “Registering Fax Numbers in the
Address Book,” on p. 3-2.
For information on how to register e-mail
addresses, see “Registering E-Mail Addresses in
the Address Book,” on p. 3-7.
For information on how to register I-fax
addresses, see “Registering I-Fax Addresses in
the Address Book,” on p. 3-10.
For information on how to register le server
addresses, see “Registering File Server
Addresses in the Address Book” on p. 3-12.
For information on how to register group
addresses, see “Registering Group Addresses in
the Address Book,” on p. 3-18.
–
–
–
–
–
④ Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-24
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
Erasing Addresses from the Address Book
This section describes the procedure for erasing addresses from the Address Book.
This section describes how to erase the destinations registered in the Address Book from the Additional Functions screen. You can also
erase them from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Specify from Address Book>, then press [OK].
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to erase.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase from Add. Book>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.
–
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Address>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the destination you want to check or edit,
then press the left Any key to select
<Edit/Erase>.
3-25
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing Address Book
You cannot erase multiple destinations at the
same time.
Use [◀] or [▶] to select the index key (e.g.,
[ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries.
Select [All] to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, use
[▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the
desired destination.
If you select [All], destinations registered in
one-touch are also displayed. However, you
cannot delete those destinations. For
information on how to delete the destinations
registered in one-touch, see “Erasing Addresses
registered in One-Touch,” on p. 3-50.
–
–
–
–
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase from Add. Book>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
If you want to cancel erasing the destination,
select <No>.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-26
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
Storing/Editing One-Touch
You can register up to 200 destinations in one-touch.
Since each address entry is treated as a single entry, if a destination is registered in a group address, that destination and
the group address are counted as two entries.
Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a le, which can be imported into the
machine. For information on how to export and import the Address Book, see “Setting from a PC,” in the e-Manual.
For easy reference, it is recommended to print the list of recipients registered in the Address Book and one-touch. For
information on how to print the lists, see “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
New destinations cannot be registered in one-touch if <Limit New Destinations> in <Send Function Restriction> in
<System Management Set.> is set to <On>.
Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch
This section describes the procedure for registering fax numbers in one-touch.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press <OK>.
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
3-27
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the one-touch you want to register, then
press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
8
Use the software keyboard to enter the
recipient’s name.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the
recipient’s name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
9
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
–
–
3-28
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch Name>, then press
[OK].
11
Use the software keyboard to enter the
one-touch name.
You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-
touch name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
12
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
–
–
13
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
14
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the fax
number.
You can enter up to 120 characters for fax
number.
If you want to move the position of the cursor,
use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel).
If you want to delete the number or character
immediately to the left of the cursor, use [▼],
[▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Backspace>, then press [OK].
If you want to insert a pause of several
seconds, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Pause>, then press [OK]. If you insert a
pause within the fax number, the letter <p> is
displayed between the numbers. If you insert
a pause at the end of the fax number, the
letter <P> appears. When dialing an overseas
number, insert a pause after the country code,
and at the end of the fax number.
If you want to directly call an extension line
that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch
Exchange), which accepts only tone signals,
use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Tone>, then press [OK].
If you want to insert a space between
numbers, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Space>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
–
–
–
3-29
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
If you want to delete the entire number you
entered, press (Clear).
For information on how to set the length of a
pause, see “Communications Settings,” on
p. 13-8.
For information on how to insert a pause for an
overseas number, see “Dialing an Overseas
Number (With Pauses),” on p. 5-22.
You cannot insert a pause or a space at the
beginning of a number.
If you enter a pause at the end of the number,
the pause is always 10 seconds long.
–
–
–
–
15
If you want to set the ECM TX, sending
speed, and long distance settings, press
the right Any key to select <Option>.
These settings are optional. If you do not want
to set the optional settings, skip to step 23.
–
16
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<ECM TX>, then press [OK].
17
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On> or <O>, then press [OK].
18
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Sending Speed>, then press [OK].
3-30
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
19
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the sending speed, then press [OK].
If your document transmissions are slow to start,
it may mean that the telephone lines in your
area are in poor condition. Select a slower
speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400
bps>, <9600 bps>, or <4800 bps>.
20
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Long Distance>, then press [OK].
21
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the long distance setting, then press [OK].
Select <Domestic> for dialing domestic (local)
telephone numbers. Select <Long Distance (1)>
if communication errors frequently occur when
you make overseas calls (when the overseas
telephone number is registered in the Address
Book). If errors persist, try selecting <Long
Distance (2)> or <Long Distance (3)>.
22
Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
23
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Destination>, then press [OK].
24
Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
If you want to register another fax number,
repeat from step 5.
3-31
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch
This section describes the procedure for registering e-mail addresses in one-touch.
By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press <OK>.
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
–
–
•
•
•
•
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
25
Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
26
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-32
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the one-touch you want to register, then
press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<E-mail>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
8
Use the software keyboard to enter the
recipient’s name.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the
recipient’s name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
9
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch Name>, then press
[OK].
–
–
3-33
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
11
Use the software keyboard to enter the
one-touch name.
You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-
touch name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
12
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
13
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
–
–
14
Use the software keyboard to enter the
recipient’s e-mail address.
You can enter up to 120 characters for the e-
mail address.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
15
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
16
Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
If you want to register another e-mail address,
repeat from step 5.
–
–
3-34
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
17
Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
18
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch
This section describes the procedure for registering I-fax addresses in one-touch.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press <OK>.
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
3-35
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the one-touch you want to register, then
press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<I-Fax>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
8
Use the software keyboard to enter the
recipient’s name.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the
recipient’s name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
9
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
–
–
3-36
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch Name>, then press
[OK].
11
Use the software keyboard to enter the
one-touch name.
You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-
touch name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
12
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
–
–
13
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
14
Use the software keyboard to enter the
recipient’s I-fax address.
You can enter up to 120 characters for the I-
fax address.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
15
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
–
–
3-37
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch
This section describes the procedure for registering le server addresses in one-touch.
If <Language Switch> in Common Settings is set to <On>, the Host Name and File Path of the le server destination may not be
displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press <OK>.
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
–
–
•
•
•
•
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
16
Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
If you want to register another I-fax address,
repeat from step 5.
17
Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
18
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-38
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the one-touch you want to register, then
press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<File>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
8
Use the software keyboard to enter the
le server name.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the le
server name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its recipient’s name, in alphabetical order.
9
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch Name>, then press
[OK].
–
–
3-39
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
11
Use the software keyboard to enter the
one-touch name.
You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-
touch name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
12
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
13
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
–
–
14
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
a server protocol, then press [OK].
<FTP>: Select this protocol if you are sending
documents to a computer running Sun Solaris
2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information
Services 5.0 on Windows 2000 Server, Internet
Information Services 5.1 on Windows XP
Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0
on Windows Server 2003, Internet Information
Services 7.0 on Windows Vista, or Red Hat
Linux 7.2.
<Windows (SMB)>: Select this protocol if you
are sending documents to a computer
running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later) or
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
<Windows (SMB): Browse>: Select this
protocol if you want to specify a le server
connected to a specic network.
After turning the main power on, you must wait
for the time set in the Startup Time Settings to
elapse before selecting <Windows (SMB):
Browse>. Network transmission is not possible
until this startup time has elapsed. (See “Network
Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
–
3-40
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
■ If you select <FTP> or <Windows (SMB)>:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Host Name>, then press [OK].
② Use the software keyboard to enter the host
name.
You can enter up to 120 characters for the
host name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
A host name is a unique name assigned to
identify each host computer that provides
services on the Internet. In this entry box, enter
the name of the le server on the network as the
destination of the send job.
–
–
③ If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
④ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Folder Path>, then press [OK].
⑤ Use the software keyboard to enter the
path to the folder.
You can enter up to 128 characters for the
folder path.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
A le path is a series of characters that signify
the location of the folder. Specify a folder in the
le server as the destination of the send job.
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, enter the folder name set in
imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS
MF9170c/9150c only).
–
–
–
–
3-41
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
⑥ If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
⑦ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<User Name>, then press [OK].
⑧ Use the software keyboard to enter the user
name.
You can enter up to 24 characters for the user
name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, enter the user name set in
imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS
MF9170c/9150c only).
–
–
⑨ If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
⑩ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Password>, then press [OK].
⑪ Use the software keyboard to enter the
password.
You can enter up to 24 characters when
<FTP> is selected as the server protocol, or up
to 14 when <Windows (SMB)> is selected.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
If you are sending to an imageWARE Document
Manager folder, enter the password set in
imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS
MF9170c/9150c only).
–
–
3-42
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
⑫ If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
⑬ Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
⑭ Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
■ If you select <Windows (SMB): Browse>:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired workgroup, then press [OK].
If the desired workgroup is not displayed, use [▼],
[▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired
workgroup.
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired le server, then press [OK].
If the desired le server is not displayed, use [▼],
[▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired le
server.
3-43
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
③ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired le server, then press the right
Any key to select <Set>.
To enter the user name and the network
password, select a le server from the list and
press [OK]. Enter the user name (up to 24
character) and network password (up to 14
characters), then press the right Any key to select
<Set>.
④ Specify the folder path, user name, and
password as described from steps 5 to 11 in
“If you select <FTP> or <Windows (SMB)>.”
⑤ Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
⑥ Press the right Any key to select <Register>.
If you want to register another le server
address, repeat from step 5.
15
Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
16
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-44
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
Registering Group Addresses in One-Touch
The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 299 stored destinations (199 for the Color
imageCLASS MF8450c) as a single destination.
You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations need to be registered in the Address Book before you can
register them as part of a group address.
The types of destinations you can register in a group address are fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and le server
addresses. You cannot register a group address in a group address.
This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Register New Dest. to One-touch>, then press <OK>.
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.
–
–
–
•
•
•
•
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
3-45
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the one-touch you want to register, then
press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Group>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
8
Use the software keyboard to enter the
group name.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the
group name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
Registered destinations are sorted in the Address
Book by its name, in alphabetical order.
9
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch Name>, then press
[OK].
–
–
3-46
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
11
Use the software keyboard to enter the
one-touch name.
You can enter up to 12 characters for the one-
touch name.
For information on how to use the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
12
If you are nished, press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
13
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Destination Registration>, then press
[OK].
–
–
14
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the destination to store in the group
address, then press [OK].
To cancel a selected destination, select the
destination again and press [OK] to clear the
check mark.
Use [◀] or [▶] to select the index key (e.g.,
[ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries.
Select [All] to return to the full address list.
If the desired destination is not displayed, use
[▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the
desired destination.
You can select a destination and press the left
Any key to select <Details> to conrm the
detailed information related to the selected
destination. Press the right Any key to select
<Done> to return to the previous screen.
–
–
–
–
15
Repeat step 14 to select all destinations
you want to register in the group address,
then press the right Any key to select
<Set>.
3-47
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in One-Touch
This section describes the procedure for checking and editing the details of the destinations registered in
one-touch.
This section describes how to check and edit the details of the destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also check
and edit the details from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to check or edit.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Conrm/Edit One-touch Dest.>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.
–
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
16
Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
If you want to register another group address,
repeat from step 5.
17
Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
18
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-48
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the one-touch you want to check or edit,
then press [OK].
You cannot check or edit multiple one-touch
destinations at the same time.
If the desired one-touch is not displayed, use
[▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the
desired one-touch.
–
–
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Details/Edit>, then press [OK].
7
Check or edit the address details.
■ If you want to check the address details:
① Check the details, then press the right Any
key to select <Done>.
■ If you want to edit the address details:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the item you want to edit, then press [OK].
② Conrm that <Edit> is selected, then press
[OK].
3-49
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
③ Edit the address details.
Follow the same procedure as you used when
registering destinations.
For information on how to register fax
numbers, see “Registering Fax Numbers in One-
Touch,” on p. 3-26.
For information on how to register e-mail
addresses, see “Registering E-Mail Addresses in
One-Touch,” on p. 3-31.
For information on how to register I-fax
addresses, see “Registering I-Fax Addresses in
One-Touch,” on p. 3-34.
For information on how to register le server
addresses, see “Registering File Server
Addresses in One-Touch,” on p. 3-37.
For information on how to register group
addresses, see “Registering Group Addresses in
One-Touch,” on p. 3-44.
–
–
–
–
–
④ Press the right Any key to select <Done>.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-50
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
Erasing Addresses Registered in One-Touch
This section describes the procedure for erasing addresses registered in one-touch.
This section describes how to erase one-touch destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also erase them from the
Select Send Type screen, as follows:
In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select <One-touch>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to erase.
Press the left Any key to select <Reg/Edit/Erase>.
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Erase from One-touch>, then press [OK].
Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.
–
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book Settings>, then press [OK].
If a password has been set for the Address Book,
enter the password to enter Address Book
Settings menu. Enter the password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details
about the Address Book password, see “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register One-touch>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the one-touch you want to erase, then
press [OK].
You cannot erase multiple one-touch
destinations at the same time.
If the desired one-touch is not displayed, use
[▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the
desired one-touch.
–
–
3-51
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
If you want to cancel erasing the destination,
select <No>.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
3-52
Storing/Editing One-Touch
Storing/Editing Address Book
Copying
4-1
This chapter describes the copying features.
Copying Chapter
4
Overview of Copy Functions .......................................4-2
Basic Copying Method ................................................4-4
Canceling Copy Jobs ....................................................4-6
Selecting Color Mode ..................................................4-7
Selecting Paper Source ...............................................4-9
Copying on Papers in Drawers ........................................4-9
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard Paper
Sizes ....................................................................................... 4-11
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of
Paper ..................................................................................... 4-13
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Envelopes .................. 4-15
Adjusting Density ......................................................4-17
Adjusting Base Color ....................................................... 4-19
2-Sided Copying ........................................................4-22
1 to 2-Sided Copying ....................................................... 4-23
2 to 2-Sided Copying ....................................................... 4-25
2 to 1-Sided Copying ....................................................... 4-27
Enlarge/Reduce Images ............................................4-30
Preset Zoom........................................................................4-30
Custom Copy Ratio........................................................... 4-32
Selecting Image Quality ............................................4-34
Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1).............4-36
Adjusting Sharpness .................................................4-39
Erasing Shadows/Lines .............................................4-41
Original Frame Erase ........................................................ 4-42
Book Frame Erase .............................................................4-45
Binding Erase ......................................................................4-48
Adjusting Color Balance ............................................4-51
Registering Color Balance .............................................. 4-53
Recalling Registered Color Balance ............................ 4-55
Deleting Color Balance ...................................................4-56
Collating Copies .........................................................4-57
Making Multiple Copies ............................................4-59
Checking Current Settings ........................................4-60
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory) .............4-61
Registering Mode Memory ........................................... 4-61
Recalling Mode Memory ................................................ 4-63
Checking Mode Memory ............................................... 4-64
Deleting Mode Memory ................................................. 4-65
Changing Standard Mode .........................................4-66
Initializing Standard Mode .......................................4-68
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking
Copy Logs ...................................................................4-69
Checking Copy Jobs ........................................................ 4-69
Canceling Copy Jobs ....................................................... 4-70
Checking Copy Logs ........................................................ 4-71
Copying
4-2
Overview of Copy Functions
Overview of Copy Functions
In addition to the enlarging/reducing the copy, you can make 2-sided copies or use the N on
1 mode, which reduces multiple originals to t on one sheet of paper.
(p. 4-11)
(p. 4-34)
(p. 4-17)
Copying
4-3
Overview of Copy Functions
(p. 4-22)
(p. 4-30)
(p. 4-36)
Copying
4-4
Basic Copying Method
Basic Copying Method
This section describes the basic procedure for copying.
1
Place originals on the platen glass or load
it them in the feeder.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
Close the feeder after placing your originals.
For originals you can copy, see “Originals
Requirements,” on p. 2-2.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
4
Make the copy settings you require.
You can specify the following settings:
<Color Mode Settings>: Species the color or
B&W. (See “Selecting Color Mode,” on p. 4-7.)
<Paper Source Settings>: Species the paper
source. (See “Selecting Paper Source,” on p. 4-
9.)
<Density/Background Rem. Set.>: Adjusts the
density and the background color of originals.
(See “Adjusting Density,” on p. 4-17)
<Various 2-Sided Settings>: Makes two-sided
copies. (See “2-Sided Copying,” on p. 4-22.)
<Copy Ratio Settings>: Adjusts the size by
enlarging/reducing original images. (See
“Enlarge/Reduce Images,” on p. 4-30.)
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Species
the image type of originals. (See “Selecting
Image Quality,” on p. 4-34.)
<Copy Multiple Pages onto 1 Page>: Reduces
multiple originals to t on one sheet of paper.
(See “Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on
1),” on p. 4-36.)
<Sharpness Settings>: Adjusts the contrast of
the originals. (See “Adjusting Sharpness,” on
p. 4-39.)
<Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>: Erases
unnecessary shadows and lines. (See “Erasing
Shadows/Lines,” on p. 4-41.)
<Color Adjustment>: Adjusts the color
balance for the copy. (See “Adjusting Color
Balance,” on p. 4-51.)
<Finishing Settings>: Sorts copies into sets.
(See “Collating Copies,” on p. 4-57.)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Copying
4-5
Basic Copying Method
<Number of Copies Settings>: Makes multiple
copies. (See “Making Multiple Copies,” on p. 4-
59.)
When you press (Reset), all settings will
return to the Standard mode. If you want to
keep your own settings as the Standard
mode, see “Changing Standard Mode,” on p. 4-
66.
5
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
If you make a mistake when entering values,
press (Clear) and enter the correct values. The
copy quantity appears on the right side of the
Copy top screen.
You cannot change the copy quantity while the
machine is copying.
–
–
6
Press (Start) to start copying.
When scanning is complete, remove your
originals.
You cannot change copy mode settings, such as
the copy quantity, paper size, and copy ratio,
while the machine is copying.
If you want to cancel a copy job, see
“Canceling Copy Jobs,” on p. 4-6, or “Checking
and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy
Logs,” on p. 4-69.
To cancel all settings and return the machine
to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
If the machine remains idle for more than two
minutes, the display returns to the Main Menu
screen (Auto Clear Time). You can change the
value of time for the Auto Clear Time. For
details, see “Setting Auto Clear Time,” on
p. 1-23.
If you want to make another copy when there
is an ongoing job, press the right Any key to
select <Done>. Then repeat from the step 1.
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
–
–
–
Copying
4-6
Canceling Copy Jobs
Canceling Copy Jobs
You can cancel scanning or ongoing jobs.
If you cancel a copy job during scanning, make sure to remove the original.
1
Press the left Any key to select <Cancel>.
The display will return to the Copy top screen.
While the machine is scanning, printing, or
waiting to print, you can cancel a copy job by
pressing (Stop).
2
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-7
Selecting Color Mode
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Color Mode Settings>, then
press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the color mode, then press [OK].
<Auto-color Select>: For the automatic
selection of color or B&W
<Color>: For copies in full-color
<Black>: For black and white copies
–
–
–
Selecting Color Mode
This section describes how to select the color mode (color/B&W).
The default setting is <Auto-color Select>.
Copying
4-8
Selecting Color Mode
6
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
7
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-9
Selecting Paper Source
Selecting Paper Source
You can manually specify a paper source.
The default setting is <Drawer1: LTR>.
If you are copying an original with an image that extends all the way to the edges onto the same size paper at a copy ratio
of 100%, the periphery of the original image may be cut o slightly on the copy. For details, see “Scanning Area,” on p. 11-4.
The sux <R> (such as in STMTR), used in paper size designations, indicates that the paper is loaded in a paper drawer or
the stack bypass tray horizontally.
Copying on Papers in Drawers
You can select paper drawer 1 or 2 (optional) for a copy. You need to set up the paper size and type for each
drawer in advance. For details about conguring the paper size and type, see “Setting Paper Size and Type,” on
p. 2-20.
–
–
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Paper Source Settings>, then
press [OK].
Copying
4-10
Selecting Paper Source
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired paper source, then press [OK].
6
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
7
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-11
Selecting Paper Source
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired paper size, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper sizes:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <STMT>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>,
<OFI>, <B-OFI>, <M-OFI>, <G-LTR>, <G-LGL>
For details, see “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
The available paper sizes will vary depending on
the country where the unit was purchased.
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard Paper Sizes
This section describes how to copy onto standard-sized paper using the stack bypass tray.
If <Stack Bypass Paper> setting in <Paper Settings> from the Additional Functions screen is set to <O>, the paper size/type setting
screen appears when you load a paper in the stack bypass tray. If Stack Bypass Standard Settings is set to <On>, copying can be
performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See “Setting Paper Size and Type,” on p. 2-20.)
Copying
4-12
Selecting Paper Source
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired paper type, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain>, <Plain H>, <Recycled Paper>, <Color>,
<Bond>, <Heavy 1>, <Heavy 2>,
<Transparencies>, <Labels>, <Rough>
For details, see “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
If you want to print the back side of the printed
paper, press the right Any key to select <2nd of 2-
Sided>.
7
Press [OK] to select <Stack Bypass Tray>.
8
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
9
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
10
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-13
Selecting Paper Source
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Custom Size>, then press [OK].
6
Press [OK] to select the horizontal length
<X>.
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of Paper
This section describes how to copy onto non-standard-sized paper using the stack bypass tray.
If <Stack Bypass Paper> setting in <Paper Settings> from the Additional Functions screen is set to <O>, the paper size/type setting
screen appears when you load a paper in the stack bypass tray. If Stack Bypass Standard Settings is set to <On>, copying can be
performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See “Setting Paper Size and Type,” on p. 2-20.)
If you set envelopes, transparencies, or labels in the stack bypass tray, the collate mode cannot be selected.
–
–
Copying
4-14
Selecting Paper Source
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
specify the length of X, then press [OK].
You can adjust values for <X> between 3" and 8
1/2".
8
Use [▼] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the
vertical length <Y>, then press [OK].
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
specify the length of Y, then press [OK].
You can adjust values for <Y> between 5" and 14".
10
Use [▼] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Size>, then press [OK].
11
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired paper type, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain>, <Plain H>, <Recycled Paper>, <Color>,
<Bond>, <Rough>, <Heavy 1>, <Heavy 2>,
<Labels>, <Envelope>
For details, see “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
If you want to print the back side of the printed
paper, press the right Any key to select <2nd of 2-
Sided>.
12
Press [OK] to select <Stack Bypass Tray>.
Copying
4-15
Selecting Paper Source
Using Stack Bypass Tray with Envelopes
This section describes how to copy onto envelopes using the stack bypass tray.
If <Stack Bypass Paper> setting in <Paper Settings> from the Additional Functions screen is set to <O>, the paper size/type setting
screen appears when you load a paper in the stack bypass tray. If Stack Bypass Standard Settings is set to <On>, copying can be
performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See “Setting Paper Size and Type,” on p. 2-20.)
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
13
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
14
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
15
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-16
Selecting Paper Source
4
Load envelopes into the stack bypass.
For details, see “In the Stack Bypass Tray,” on p. 2-
15.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired size of envelopes, then press
[OK].
You can select from the following sizes of
envelopes:
<COM10>, <Monarch>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <ISO-
B5>
For details, see “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
6
Press [OK] to select <Stack Bypass Tray>.
7
Press (Start).
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-17
Adjusting Density
Adjusting Density
You can manually adjust the copy exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
The copy tone becomes lighter as the indicator moves to the left, and darker as it moves to
the right.
The default setting is <0>.
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>,
then press [OK].
Copying
4-18
Adjusting Density
5
Use [▼], [▲], [◀], [▶], or (Scroll
Wheel) to adjust the copy density, then
press [OK].
To make dark originals lighter, move the
density scale to the left.
To make light originals darker, move the
density scale to the right.
6
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
–
–
7
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-19
Adjusting Density
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>,
then press [OK].
5
Press the right Any key to select
<Background>.
Adjusting Base Color
This mode enables you to adjust or remove the base color of the originals.
The default setting is <O>.
Copying
4-20
Adjusting Density
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the background setting, then press [OK].
■ If you select <Background Removal>:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Background Removal>, then press [OK].
② Press [OK], then skip to step 7.
■ If you select <Background Fine Adjust.>:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Background Fine Adjust.>, then press [OK].
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired color, then press [OK].
③ Use [▼], [▲], [◀], [▶] or (Scroll Wheel)
to adjust the strength of the color, then
press [OK].
④ Press the right Any key to select <Set>, then
press [OK].
7
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
Copying
4-21
Adjusting Density
8
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
9
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-22
2-Sided Copying
2-Sided Copying
This mode enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals, or
make one-sided copies from two-sided originals. This enables you to cut print costs in half
when copying in large quantities.
The default setting is <O>.
When you use the feeder to make two-sided copies from two-sided originals or one-sided copies from two-sided
originals, the original size must be LTR, LGL, FLSC, or A4.
For the paper size that can be used for the 2-sided copying, see the following:
e-Manual > “Print” > “Printer Settings from the Machine” > “Settings Menu” > “2-Sided”
(The same paper size can be used for the 2-sided copying and 2-sided printing.)
–
–
Copying
4-23
2-Sided Copying
1 to 2-Sided Copying
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Various 2-Sided Settings>, then
press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<1-Sided to 2-Sided>.
If there are odd number of originals when the 1-
Sided to 2-Sided mode is used, the back side of
the last copy is left blank.
6
Press the right Any key to select <Layout
Settings>.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Vertical Original> or <Horizontal
Original>, then press [OK].
Copying
4-24
2-Sided Copying
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Book Type Copy> or <Calendar Type
Copy>, then press [OK].
<Book Type Copy>: The front and back sides
of the copy will have the same top-bottom
orientation.
<Calendar Type Copy>: The front and back
sides of the copy will have the opposite top-
bottom orientation.
9
Press [OK].
–
–
10
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
11
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page. After scanning all originals,
press the right Any key to select <Done>.
12
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-25
2-Sided Copying
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Various 2-Sided Settings>, then
press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<2-Sided to 2-Sided>, then press [OK].
6
Press the right Any key to select <Layout
Settings>.
2 to 2-Sided Copying
When you use the feeder to make two-sided copies from two-sided originals, the original size must be LTR, LGL, FLSC, or A4.
Copying
4-26
2-Sided Copying
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Vertical Original> or <Horizontal
Original>, then press [OK].
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type
Original> for the original layout, then
press [OK].
<Book Type Original>: The front and back
sides of the original will have the same top-
bottom orientation.
<Calendar Type Original>: The front and back
sides of the original will have the opposite
top-bottom orientation.
–
–
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Book Type Copy> or <Calendar Type
Copy>, then press [OK].
<Book Type Copy>: The front and back sides
of the copy will have the same top-bottom
orientation.
<Calendar Type Copy>: The front and back
sides of the copy will have the opposite top-
bottom orientation.
10
Press [OK].
11
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
–
–
Copying
4-27
2-Sided Copying
12
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page. After scanning all originals,
press the right Any key to select <Done>.
13
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
2 to 1-Sided Copying
When you use the feeder to make one-sided copies from two-sided originals, the original size must be LTR, LGL, FLSC, or A4.
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Various 2-Sided Settings>, then
press [OK].
Copying
4-28
2-Sided Copying
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<2-Sided to 1-Sided>.
6
Press the right Any key to select <Layout
Settings>.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Vertical Original> or <Horizontal
Original>, then press [OK].
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type
Original> for the original layout, then
press [OK].
<Book Type Original>: The front and back
sides of the original will have the same top-
bottom orientation.
<Calendar Type Original>: The front and back
sides of the original will have the opposite
top-bottom orientation.
9
Press [OK].
10
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
–
–
Copying
4-29
2-Sided Copying
11
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page. After scanning all originals,
press the right Any key to select <Done>.
12
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-30
Enlarge/Reduce Images
Enlarge/Reduce Images
You can convert a standard-sized original to a dierent standard-sized copy (preset zoom),
or you can also enlarge or reduce images in 1% increments (custom copy ratio).
The default setting is <100% 1:1>.
Preset Zoom
You can enlarge or reduce originals from one standard paper size to another.
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
Copying
4-31
Enlarge/Reduce Images
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Copy Ratio Settings>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the zoom ratio, then press [OK].
You can select the preset zoom from the
following:
<100% Direct>
<200% Maximum>
<129% STMT▶LTR>
<78% LGL▶LTR>
<64% LTR▶STMT>
<50% Minimum>
If you want to specify the other copy ratio, see
“Custom Copy Ratio,” on p. 4-32.
–
–
–
–
–
–
6
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
7
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-32
Enlarge/Reduce Images
Custom Copy Ratio
You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio in 1% increments. The available copy ratios are from 50%
to 200%.
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Copy Ratio Settings>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Custom Copy Ratio>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
adjust the zoom ratio in 1% increments,
then press [OK].
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a
message prompting you to enter an appropriate
value appears on the screen.
7
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
Copying
4-33
Enlarge/Reduce Images
8
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
9
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-34
Selecting Image Quality
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
Selecting Image Quality
You can adjust the image quality of copies according to the types of originals. A correct
selection is necessary for the optimal reproduction of the colors of the original.
The default setting is <Text/Photo/Map>.
Combinations of these four modes (Text/Photo/Map, Printed Image, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same
time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
If the original is a transparency, select the original type, then adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the
original.
–
–
Copying
4-35
Selecting Image Quality
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Original Image Quality
Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the image quality, then press [OK].
<Text/Photo/Map>: For originals that contain
text, photos, and maps
If you select <Text/Photo/Map>, you can set
priority on <Text> or <Photo>. Press the right Any
key to select <Priority Level>, then use [▼], [▲],
[◀], [▶] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the priority
revel.
<Printed Image>: For originals that contain
dot photos such as magazines
<Photo>: For photo paper originals such as
photos
<Text>: For originals that contain only text
–
–
–
–
6
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
7
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-36
Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)
Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)
This mode enables you to reduce multiple originals to t on one sheet of paper (one-sided/
two-sided). You can make well-organized copies by copying multiple originals onto one
sheet. This mode enables you to cut print costs by saving copy papers, and it is also useful
for saving space.
The default setting is <O>.
The N on 1 mode cannot be used with the Original Frame Erase mode, Book Frame Erase, or Binding Erase mode. For
details about the erase mode, see “Erasing Shadows/Lines,” on p. 4-41.
The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals t onto the selected paper size.
–
–
Copying
4-37
Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
When placing horizontal (landscape) originals into
the feeder in the 2 on 1 mode, place the originals
bottom side up.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Copy Multiple Pages onto 1
Page>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the combination type, then press [OK].
<2 On 1>: This setting reduces two 1-sided
originals or one 2-sided original to t onto
one side or both sides of the copy sheet.
<4 On 1>: This setting reduces four 1-sided or
two 2-sided originals to t onto one side or
both sides of the copy sheet.
If you select <4 On 1>, you can specify the copy
layout. Press the right Any key to select
<Option>, then select the desired layout type.
–
–
Copying
4-38
Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
To switch to the A/B Sizes, press the left Any key
to select <A/B Sizes>.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the paper source, then press [OK].
If you select <Stack Bypass Tray>, specify the
paper size and type.
If you want to make two-sided copies of N on
1, see “2-Sided Copying,” on p. 4-22.
If you want to make N on 1 copies from two-
sided originals, select <2-Sided to 1-Sided> in
the two-sided settings. For details, see “2-Sided
Copying,” on p. 4-22.
–
–
8
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
9
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page. After scanning all originals,
press the right Any key to select <Done>.
10
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-39
Adjusting Sharpness
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Sharpness Settings>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲], [◀], [▶] or (Scroll
Wheel) to adjust the sharpness, then
press [OK].
To make copies of printed images or other
halftones, move the sharpness scale to the
left.
To make copies of blueprints or faint pencil-
drawn images, move the sharpness scale to
the right.
–
–
Adjusting Sharpness
You can set the sharpness of the copied image. If you want to copy text and lines more
clearly, move the sharpness scale to the right. If you want to copy a halftone original such as
a picture, move the sharpness scale to the left.
The default setting is <0>.
Copying
4-40
Adjusting Sharpness
6
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
7
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-41
Erasing Shadows/Lines
Erasing Shadows/Lines
This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when using various types of
originals. The following three Frame Erase modes are available: Original Frame Erase, Book
Frame Erase, and Binding Erase.
The default setting is <O>.
Combinations of the three Frame Erase modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is
canceled.
Copying
4-42
Erasing Shadows/Lines
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>,
then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Original Frame Erase>, then press [OK].
Original Frame Erase
This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the copy if the original is smaller than
the selected paper size. You can also use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the copy.
The Original Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the N on 1 mode.
Copying
4-43
Erasing Shadows/Lines
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
To switch to the A/B Sizes, press the left Any key
to select <A/B Sizes>.
■ If you want to set the same width for all four
borders:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a
frame erase width value, then press [OK].
The default setting is <3/16" (6 mm)>. The
maximum original frame erase width that you
can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.
To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any
key to select <Enter mm>. When entering the
value in millimeters, you can also use [▼], [▲],
(Scroll Wheel), and – (numeric keys).
If you want to change the value, press
(Clear) before entering the new value.
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a
message prompting you to enter an
appropriate value appears on the screen.
–
–
–
–
■ If you want to set the top, left, right, and
bottom widths independently:
① Press the right Any key to select <Adj. Each
Dim.>.
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired frame erase borders, then press
[OK].
To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any
key to select <Enter mm>. When entering the
value in millimeters, you can also use [▼], [▲],
(Scroll Wheel), and – (numeric keys).
Copying
4-44
Erasing Shadows/Lines
③ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a
frame erase width value, then press [OK].
The default setting is <3/16" (6 mm)>. The
maximum original frame erase width that you
can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.
If you want to change the value, press
(Clear) before entering the new value.
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a
message prompting you to enter an
appropriate value appears on the screen.
–
–
–
④ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Apply Settings>, then press [OK].
The display will return to the Copy top screen.
7
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
8
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
9
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-45
Erasing Shadows/Lines
Book Frame Erase
This mode erases the dark borders and the center and contour lines that appear when you copy facing pages
in a book or bound original onto a single sheet of paper.
The Book Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the N on 1.
You must place an original on the platen glass when using this function.
–
–
1
Set an original on the platen glass.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>,
then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Book Frame Erase>, then press [OK].
Copying
4-46
Erasing Shadows/Lines
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
To switch to the A/B Sizes, press the left Any key
to select <A/B Sizes>.
7
Enter the each erase width value:
■ If you want to specify the erase width
value for center:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Center>, then press [OK].
To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any
key to select <Enter mm>.
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a
frame erase width value, then press [OK].
The default setting is <3/8" (10 mm)>. The
maximum original frame erase width that you
can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.
When entering the value in millimeters, you
can also use [▼], [▲], (Scroll Wheel), or
– (numeric keys).
If you want to change the value, press
(Clear) before entering the new value.
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a
message prompting you to enter an
appropriate value appears on the screen.
–
–
–
–
■ If you want to specify the erase width
value for all sides:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<All Sides>, then press [OK].
Copying
4-47
Erasing Shadows/Lines
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a
frame erase width value, then press [OK].
The default setting is <3/16" (6 mm)>. The
maximum original frame erase width that you can
set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Apply Settings>, then press [OK].
9
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
10
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
11
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-48
Erasing Shadows/Lines
1
Set an original on the platen glass.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>,
then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Binding Erase>, then press [OK].
Binding Erase
This mode erases the shadows that appear on copies from binding holes on originals.
Do not place originals with binding holes into the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
The borders you do not select are attenuated when using this function.
You must place an original on the platen glass when using this function.
–
–
–
Copying
4-49
Erasing Shadows/Lines
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
To switch to the inch sizes, press the left Any key
to select <A/B Sizes>.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the hole punch location, then press [OK].
To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any
key to select <Enter mm>.
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the frame erase width, then press [OK].
The default setting is <3/4" (18 mm)>. The
maximum original frame erase width that you
can set is <13/16" (20 mm)>.
If you want to change the value, press
(Clear) before entering the new value.
If you enter a value outside the setting range, a
message prompting you to enter an
appropriate value appears on the screen.
When entering the value in millimeters, you
can also use [▼], [▲], (Scroll Wheel), or –
(numeric keys).
–
–
–
–
9
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
Copying
4-50
Erasing Shadows/Lines
10
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
11
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-51
Adjusting Color Balance
1
Set documents.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Color Adjustment>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired color, then press [OK].
Adjusting Color Balance
This mode enables you to adjust the color balance depending on the color of the originals.
The adjusted color balance can be stored and named so that you can use them repeatedly.
Copying
4-52
Adjusting Color Balance
6
Use [▼], [▲], [◀], [▶] or (Scroll
Wheel) to adjust the strength of each
color then, press [OK].
To weaken the selected color, move the adjust
scale to the left.
To heighten the selected color, move the
adjust scale to the right.
7
Press the left Any key to select <Set>.
–
–
8
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
9
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
10
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-53
Adjusting Color Balance
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Color Adjustment>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired color, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲], [◀], [▶] or (Scroll
Wheel) to adjust the strength of each
color, then press [OK].
To weaken the selected color, move the adjust
scale to the left.
To heighten the selected color, move the
adjust scale to the right.
6
Press the right Any key to select <Recall/
Register>.
–
–
Registering Color Balance
This section describes how to register the color balance setting. Up to four dierent settings can be stored.
Copying
4-54
Adjusting Color Balance
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the memory key that you want to store
the color balance setting under, then
press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Settings>.
■ If you want to name the color balance
setting:
① Use [▼] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
② Use the software keyboard to enter a name,
then press the right Any key to select
<Set>.
You can enter up to 10 characters for the
name.
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel)
to select <Yes>, then press [OK].
10
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Copying
4-55
Adjusting Color Balance
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Color Adjustment>, then press
[OK].
4
Press the right Any key to select <Recall/
Register>.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired memory key, then press [OK].
6
Press the left Any key to select <Set>.
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Recalling Registered Color Balance
This section describes how to recall registered Color Balance.
Copying
4-56
Adjusting Color Balance
Deleting Color Balance
This section describes how to delete the color balance setting.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Color Adjustment>, then press
[OK].
4
Press the right Any key to select <Recall/
Register>.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the memory key that you want to delete,
then press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
6
Use [▼] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-57
Collating Copies
Collating Copies
You can sort copies into sets arranged in page order. This function is useful when making
handouts for meetings.
The default setting is <O>.
The Collate mode cannot be set if Envelope, Transparency, or Labels is selected as the paper type.
Copying
4-58
Collating Copies
1
Set originals.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
display <Finishing Settings>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
6
Use – (numeric keys) to enter the
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
7
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-59
Making Multiple Copies
1
Set documents.
For details, see “Placing Originals,” on p. 2-4.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Number of Copies Settings>,
then press [OK].
5
Use – (numeric keys), [▼], [▲] or
(Scroll Wheel) to enter the desired copy
quantity (1 to 99), then press [OK].
6
Press (Start).
If you want to copy multiple originals using the
platen glass, set an original and press (Start)
once for each page.
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Making Multiple Copies
This section describes how to make multiple copies.
Copying
4-60
Checking Current Settings
Checking Current Settings
This section describes how to conrm the current settings.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Press the right Any key to select <Preview
Img.>.
4
Check the current settings, then press the
right Any key to select <Done>.
5
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-61
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Press the left Any key to select <Mode
Memory>.
The currently specied settings are registered for
the mode memory.
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)
You can set any possible combination of copy modes and store them as a mode memory.
There are four mode memories, and they can be assigned names for increased convenience.
This feature is useful for storing frequently used copy settings.
Even if the power is turned OFF, the copy settings stored in memory keys are not deleted.
Registering Mode Memory
This section describes how to register the copy settings to a mode memory.
Even if the power is turned OFF, the copy settings stored in memory keys are not deleted.
Copying
4-62
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the mode memory key that you want to
store the copy settings under, then press
the right Any key to select <Register/
Erase>.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Settings>.
■ If you want to name the mode memory
setting:
① Use [▼] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
② Use the software keyboard to enter a name,
then press the right Any key to select
<Set>.
You can enter up to 10 characters for the
name.
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
If you want to check the details of the setting,
use [▼] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Details>,
then press [OK].
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Copying
4-63
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Press the left Any key to select <Mode
Memory>.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired mode memory, then press
[OK].
5
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Recalling Mode Memory
This section describes how to recall the registered mode memories.
Copying
4-64
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)
Checking Mode Memory
This section describes how to conrm the registered mode memories.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Press the left Any key to select <Mode
Memory>.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired mode memory, then press the
left Any key to select <Details>.
5
Check the details of the mode memory,
then press the right Any key to select
<Done>.
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-65
Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Press the left Any key to select <Mode
Memory>.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the mode memory key that you want to
delete, then press the right Any key to
select <Register/Erase>.
5
Use [▼] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Deleting Mode Memory
This section describes how to delete the copy settings from the mode memory list.
Copying
4-66
Changing Standard Mode
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Standard Mode Reg./Initialize>,
then press [OK].
The currently specied settings are registered as
the standard mode.
Changing Standard Mode
The Standard mode is the combination of copy modes that the machine automatically
applies when the power is turned ON, or when (Reset) is pressed. You can change the
Standard mode to suit your needs.
The default settings are as follows:
<Color Mode Settings>: Auto-color Select
<Density/Background Rem. Set.>: 0
<Various 2-Sided Settings>: O
<Copy Ratio Settings>: 100%
<Paper Source Settings>: Drawer 1: LTR
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Text/Photo/Map
<Copy Multiple Pages onto 1 Page>: O
<Sharpness Settings>: 0
<Shadow/Frame Erase Settings>: O
<Color Adjustment>: Default
<Finishing Settings>: O
<Number of Copies Settings>: 1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Copying
4-67
Changing Standard Mode
4
Press [OK] to select <Register>.
5
Use [▼] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-68
Initializing Standard Mode
Initializing Standard Mode
This section describes how to initialize the current standard mode.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Standard Mode Reg./Initialize>,
then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Initialize>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-69
Conrming and Canceling Copy Jobs/Conrming Copy Logs
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking
Copy Logs
This section describes how to conrm copy jobs/logs, or cancel copy jobs.
Checking Copy Jobs
You can check the status of a copy job while it is printing or waiting to be processed.
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Job Status>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired job, then press the left Any
key to select <Details>.
5
Check the copy status, then press the
right Any key to select <Done>.
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-70
Conrming and Canceling Copy Jobs/Conrming Copy Logs
Canceling Copy Jobs
You can cancel a copy job while it is printing or waiting to be processed.
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Job Status>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired job, then press the right Any
key to select <Cancel>.
If you want to check the copy information, press
the left Any key to select <Details>.
5
Use [▼] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-71
Conrming and Canceling Copy Jobs/Conrming Copy Logs
Checking Copy Logs
You can check copy logs that contain detailed information of nished copy jobs.
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Copy>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Log>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired job, then press the left Any
key to select <Details>.
5
Check the copy log, then press the right
Any key to select <Done>.
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Copying
4-72
Conrming and Canceling Copy Jobs/Conrming Copy Logs
Fax
Fax Chapter
5
Overview of Fax Functions .................................................................5-2
Introduction to Using Fax Functions ................................................. 5-4
Methods for Receiving Faxes .....................................................................5-4
Selecting the Receive Mode .......................................................................5-9
Setting the Current Date and Time ....................................................... 5-12
Setting the Type of Telephone Line ...................................................... 5-13
Registering the Machine’s Name ........................................................... 5-14
Registering Your Machine’s Fax Number............................................. 5-16
«Sending Faxes»
Sending Fax Documents ..................................................................5-17
Basic Methods for Sending Faxes .......................................................... 5-17
Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual
Sending) ......................................................................................................... 5-19
Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing................................................ 5-21
Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) ...................................... 5-22
Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes ....................................................... 5-25
Basic Methods for Sending PC Faxes .................................................... 5-27
Canceling Sending Fax Documents .................................................5-29
Specifying Destinations ...................................................................5-30
Specifying a New Fax Number................................................................ 5-30
Using the Address Book ............................................................................ 5-32
Using the One-Touch ................................................................................. 5-34
Using the Group Addresses ..................................................................... 5-36
Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) .. 5-39
Selecting Resolution ........................................................................5-41
Adjusting Density .............................................................................5-42
Manual Exposure Adjustment ............................................................... 5-42
Adjusting Base Color ................................................................................. 5-43
Selecting Image Quality ...................................................................5-45
2-Sided Original ................................................................................5-47
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) .................5-49
Direct Sending ..................................................................................5-52
Favorites ............................................................................................5-54
Registering Favorites .................................................................................. 5-54
Erasing Favorites .......................................................................................... 5-58
Using the Favorites ..................................................................................... 5-61
Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites ........................................... 5-62
Job Recall ..........................................................................................5-64
ECM Transmission .............................................................................5-67
Adjusting the Pause Time ................................................................5-69
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial) ......5-71
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending .........................................5-74
Standard Send Settings ...................................................................5-76
Storing the Standard Send Settings ..................................................... 5-76
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default ................ 5-78
Printing the TX Terminal ID .............................................................5-80
Adjusting Sharpness ........................................................................5-83
Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation..5-85
Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default .................5-87
Send Start Speed ..............................................................................5-89
«Receiving Faxes»
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper ..................5-91
Reducing a Received Document ......................................................5-93
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document .................5-96
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low ........................5-98
ECM Reception ................................................................................5-100
Setting the Incoming Ring Tone ....................................................5-102
Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone
(Remote Reception) ........................................................................5-104
Activating the Remote Reception .......................................................5-104
Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception ......................5-105
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode ..........5-106
Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders ..........5-108
Receive Start Speed ........................................................................5-110
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out
(Memory Lock Reception) ..............................................................5-112
Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception
Mode ................................................................................................5-115
«Forwarding Received Faxes»
Forwarding Received Fax Documents...........................................5-117
Specifying Forwarding Settings ...........................................................5-117
Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination ......5-129
Handling Documents with Forwarding Errors ................................5-131
Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors .............................5-133
Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with
Forwarding Errors ......................................................................................5-135
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory ...5-138
Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents.........................5-138
Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents ..............................5-140
Checking/Printing the Fax Log .............................................................5-141
Fax
5-2
Overview of Fax Functions
Overview of Fax Functions
You can send faxes/I-faxes from your computer and use, including using the fax function
that supports Super G3. You can also forward received fax/I-fax documents to specied
destinations.
(p. 5-17) (p. 5-25) (p. 5-27)
(p. 5-117)
(p. 5-45)
(p. 5-42)
(p. 5-41)
Fax
5-3
Overview of Fax Functions
(p. 5-30)
(p. 5-47) (p. 5-54)
(p. 5-49)
(p. 5-112) (p. 5-104)
Fax
5-4
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
This section describes the things that you must do before using fax functions.
Be sure to set the following items rst:
Your fax number
Register your machine’s fax number. (See “Registering Your Machine’s Fax Number,” on p. 5-16.)
Your personal name or company name
Register your name or company name. (See “Registering the Machine’s Name,” on p. 5-14.)
Time and date
Set the current time and date. (See “Setting the Current Date and Time,” on p. 5-12.)
Your telephone line type
Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine. (See “Setting the Type of Telephone
Line,” on p. 5-13.)
Fax receiving mode
Set how the machine receives fax documents to suit your needs. (See “Methods for Receiving Faxes,”
on p. 5-4.)
Methods for Receiving Faxes
Your machine provides several methods for receiving fax documents. You can receive documents
automatically or manually. Follow the chart below to choose the fax receive mode that best suits your needs.
The default setting is <Auto RX>.
●
●
●
●
●
Fax
5-5
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
Auto RX Mode
In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically. Select this mode if you use the machine for fax
operations only, and not for voice communications using an external telephone.
Before using this mode
Simply set the receive mode to <Auto RX>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,” on p. 5-9.)
When an incoming call is received
With no external telephone connected to the machine:
For fax calls, the machine receives fax documents automatically.
For telephone calls, you cannot talk to the caller.
With external telephone connected to the machine:
If you want to change <Incoming Ring>, see “Setting the Incoming Ring Tone,” on p. 5-102.
●
●
●
–
•
•
–
Fax
5-6
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
Fax/Tel Auto Switch Mode
In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and the external telephone
connected to the machine rings for telephone calls. (If <Incoming Ring> is set to <On>, the external
telephone rings for both fax and telephone calls. To set the telephone to ring only when a telephone call is
received, set <Incoming Ring> to <O>.)
Before using this mode
Make sure to do the following:
Connect your external telephone to the machine. (See “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.)
Set the receive mode to <Auto/Tel Auto Switch>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,” on p. 5-9.)
When an incoming call is received
If you want to change <Incoming Ring>, see “Setting the Incoming Ring Tone,” on p. 5-102.
If you want to change <Ring Start Time>, <Fax/Tel Ring Time>, or <After Ring Action>, see “Selecting the Receive Mode,” on p. 5-9.
●
●
–
–
●
–
–
Fax
5-7
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
Answer Mode
In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and your answering machine records
a message for telephone calls.
Before using this mode
Make sure to do the following:
Connect your external telephone with built-in answering machine to the machine. (See “Introduction of the
Machine,” in the e-Manual.)
Set your answering machine to answer after 1 to 2 rings.
Record a message on your answering machine. (When you record a message, we recommend you insert
about 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the message, or limit the message to 20 seconds.)
Set the receive mode to <Answer Mode>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,” on p. 5-9.)
When an incoming call is received
This mode does not support voice mail.
Make sure to change the receive mode if you turn o your answering machine; otherwise, the machine cannot receive fax
documents automatically.
●
●
–
–
–
–
●
–
–
Fax
5-8
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
Manual RX Mode
In this mode, you can monitor all incoming calls by picking up the handset each time your telephone rings.
This mode is a suitable option if you expect to use the machine mainly as a telephone, and only occasionally
receive fax documents.
Before using this mode
Make sure to do the following:
Connect your external telephone to the machine. (See “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.)
Set the receive mode to <Manual RX>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,” on p. 5-9.)
When an incoming call is received
*If <Remote RX> is set to <On>, you can also start to receive fax documents by dialing from your telephone.
(See “Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception),” on p. 5-104.)
If you do not pick up the handset, you receive neither telephone nor fax calls. However, setting <Manual/Auto Switch> to <On> enables
you to receive fax documents automatically after the telephone rings for a specied length of time. (See “Adjusting the Auto Switch Time
for the Manual RX Mode,” on p. 5-106.)
●
●
–
–
●
Fax
5-9
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
DRPD Mode
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive
ring patterns to a single telephone line, allowing you to have both a fax number(s) and a telephone number(s)
using only one telephone line. Your fax will automatically monitor incoming calls and based on the ring
pattern, will let you know if the call is a fax or voice call. Set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern
assigned by your telephone company. Contact your telephone company for availability.
Before using this mode
Make sure to do the following:
Subscribe to a DRPD service. Contact your telephone company for availability.
Connect your external telephone to the machine. (See “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.)
Set the receive mode to <DRPD>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,” on p. 5-9.)
Selecting the Receive Mode
Select the fax receive mode to suite your needs.
The default setting is <Auto RX>.
●
●
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-10
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Reception Mode Selection>, then press
[OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired receive mode, then press
[OK].
For <Fax/Tel Auto Switch> and <DRPD>, you
can specify optional settings. If you want to
specify the optional settings, press [OK] again.
■ If you specify the optional settings for <Fax/
Tel Auto Switch>:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax/Tel Auto Switch>, then press the
right Any key to select <Option>.
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Ring Start Time>, then press [OK].
③ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify
the duration (4 to 30 seconds) for which the
machine attempts to detect the fax tone
before it starts ringing, then press [OK].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to
specify the duration.
If the machine receives a fax, the machine
does not ring and switches to the receive
mode automatically.
The default setting is <6 Seconds>.
–
–
–
Fax
5-11
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
④ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax/Tel Ring Time>, then press [OK].
⑤ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify
the duration (15 to 300 seconds) of ringing,
then press [OK].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to
specify the duration.
The default setting is <15 Seconds>.
⑥ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<After Ring Action>, then press [OK].
–
–
⑦ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the action the machine will take after the
ringing ends, then press [OK].
<Done>: Disconnects the call.
<Receive>: Receives a fax.
■ If you specify the optional settings for
<DRPD>:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<DRPD>, then press the right Any key to
select <Option>.
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a
ring pattern, then press [OK].
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Fax
5-12
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Timer Settings>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Date/Time Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Current Time Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Enter the current date and time using
– (numeric keys), then press [OK].
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Setting the Current Date and Time
You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings
for functions that require them.
Fax
5-13
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<User Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Tel. Line Type Selection>, then press
[OK].
Setting the Type of Telephone Line
Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine.
If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to communicate with other machines. Be sure to check the type
of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting.
The default setting is <Tone>.
Fax
5-14
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Manual>, then press [OK].
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the type of telephone line, then press
[OK].
<Pulse>: Pulse dialing
<Tone>: Tone dialing
If you do not know the telephone line type,
call your telephone service provider for
details.
9
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
–
Registering the Machine’s Name
Your name or company’s name must be registered as the machine’s name.
When you send a document, the name that you registered is printed as the sender’s name on the recipient’s
paper.
Fax
5-15
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Unit Name>, then press [OK].
7
Use the software keyboard to enter the
machine’s name, then press the right Any
key to select <Set>.
For information on using the software keyboard,
see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-16
Introduction to Using Fax Functions
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<User Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Unit Telephone #>, then press
[OK].
7
Enter the machine’s fax number using
– (numeric keys), then press the
right Any key to select <Register>.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Registering Your Machine’s Fax Number
Your machine’s fax number must be registered. When you send a document, the number that you registered is
printed on the recipient’s paper.
Fax
5-17
Sending Fax Documents
Sending Fax Documents
This section describes the settings and procedures for sending fax documents.
Basic Methods for Sending Faxes
This section describes the ow of sending faxes.
1
Place your originals.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
5
Enter the fax number using – ,
and (numeric keys).
You can enter up to 120 characters for the fax
number.
For details about how to specify destinations,
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
–
–
«Sending Faxes»
Fax
5-18
Sending Fax Documents
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Destination>, then press [OK].
7
Make the scan settings you require.
You can specify the following settings:
<Resolution Settings>: Adjusts the resolution
of originals. (See “Selecting Resolution,” on
p. 5-41.)
<Density/Background Rem.Set.>: Adjusts the
density and the background color of originals.
(See “Adjusting Density,” on p. 5-42.)
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Adjusts the
image quality of originals. (See “Selecting
Image Quality,” on p. 5-45.)
<2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two-
sided originals for sending. (See “2-Sided
Original,” on p. 5-47.)
<Delayed TX Settings>: Sends scanned
documents at a specied time. (See “Sending
Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending),”
on p. 5-49.)
<Direct Send Settings>: Sends each page of
the document to the destination as it is
scanned. (See “Direct Sending,” on p. 5-52.)
<Register Favorites>: Stores frequently used
send settings for future use. (See “Favorites,” on
p. 5-54.)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
8
Press (Start)
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the
feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the
specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
10
Press (Start).
–
–
Fax
5-19
Sending Fax Documents
Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending)
Use manual sending when you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document, or if the recipient
does not have a fax machine that can receive automatically.
You cannot use group addresses for manual sending.
1
Connect an external telephone to the
machine if you want to talk to the
recipient before sending a document.
For information on how to connect an external
telephone to the machine, see “Introduction of
the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
2
Place your originals.
You can only send one page at a time when you
place your original on the platen glass.
11
Follow the instructions on the display,
then press (Start) once for each
original.
12
When scanning is complete, press the
right Any key to select <Done>.
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent
to the specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
–
–
Fax
5-20
Sending Fax Documents
3
Press (Main Menu).
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
6
Press the left Any key to select <Hook> or
pick up the handset of your external
telephone.
7
Dial the recipient’s fax number.
You can enter up to 120 characters for the fax
number.
Make sure to conrm the dial tone before
entering a fax number. If you enter the
number before the dial tone can be heard, the
call may not connect, or the wrong number
may be dialed.
–
–
8
Talk through the handset to the recipient.
If you select <Hook> in step 6, you can pick
up the handset when you hear the recipient’s
voice.
If you hear a high-pitched signal instead of
the recipient’s voice, go to step 10.
9
Ask the recipient to set their fax machine
to receive faxes.
10
When you hear a high-pitched signal, use
[▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Start>, then press [OK] before
hanging up the handset.
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent
to the specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel>.
–
–
–
–
Fax
5-21
Sending Fax Documents
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
4
Press the left Any key to select <Hook>.
5
Enter the number of the fax information
service using – (numeric keys).
■If you are using one-touch:
①Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<One-touch>, then press [OK].
②Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired one-touch, then press the
right Any key to select <Set>.
Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing
If your machine is set for pulse dialing, use the procedure below to switch to tone dialing to use information
services (e.g., banks, airline reservations, and hotel reservations).
To talk to the other party, you will need to connect an external telephone to the machine.
Fax
5-22
Sending Fax Documents
6
When the recorded message of the
information service answers, use [▼], [▲]
or (Scroll Wheel) to select <Tone> to
switch to tone dialing, then press [OK].
If you are already using this machine with
tone dialing, this step is not necessary.
After you press <Tone>, <T> appears on the
display.
–
–
7
Enter the numbers requested by the
information service using –
(numeric keys).
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Start>, then press [OK] if you require
a faxed copy of the information.
If you do not require a faxed copy of the
information, press the right Any key to select
<Done>.
Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses)
When you dial or register an overseas number, you may need to insert a pause within the number.
1
Place your originals.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-23
Sending Fax Documents
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
5
Enter the international access code using
– (numeric keys).
6
If necessary, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll
Wheel) to select <Pause>, then press
[OK].
You can enter successive pauses within the fax
number to make the pause time longer.
You can change the length of a pause inserted
within the fax number in <Set Pause Time>.
The default setting is two second. (See
“Adjusting the Pause Time,” on p. 5-69.)
–
–
7
Enter the country code, the area code,
and the fax number of the recipient.
8
If necessary, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll
Wheel) to select <Pause>, then press
[OK].
Pauses entered at the end of fax numbers are
always 10 seconds long.
9
Press (Start).
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the
feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the
specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel>.
–
–
Fax
5-24
Sending Fax Documents
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
11
Press (Start).
12
Follow the instructions on the display,
then press (Start) once for each
original.
13
When scanning is complete, press the
right Any key to select <Done>.
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent
to the specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel>.
–
–
Fax
5-25
Sending Fax Documents
1
Place your originals.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter I-Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
5
Use the software keyboard to enter the I-
fax address, then press the right Any key
to select <Set>.
You can enter up to 120 characters for the I-
fax address.
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
–
–
Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes
This section describes the ow of sending I-faxes.
The following conditions are always selected:
Paper Size: LTR
This is because the sender does not know whether the recipient’s machine can receive sizes other than LTR. Originals larger than LTR are
reduced to LTR size.
File Format: TIFF
Resolution: B&W 200 × 100 dpi or B&W 200 × 200 dpi
–
–
–
Fax
5-26
Sending Fax Documents
6
Make the scan settings you require.
You can specify the following settings:
<Color/File Format Settings>: Sets <B&W TIFF
(Divide into Pages)> or <B&W TIFF (Do Not
Divide into Pages)>.*
<Resolution Settings>: Adjusts the resolution
of originals. (See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
<Density/Background Rem.Set.>: Adjusts the
density and the background color of originals.
(See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Adjusts the
image quality of originals. (See “Fax,” in the e-
Manual.)
<2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two-
sided originals for sending. (See “Fax,” in the e-
Manual.)
<Delayed TX Settings>: Sends scanned
documents at a specied time. (See “Fax,” in
the e-Manual.)
<Send Document Name Settings>: Sets the
document’s name. (See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
<Subject/Message Settings>: Sets the subject
line and message body text. (See “Fax,” in the
e-Manual.)
<Reply-to Settings>: Sets the reply-to address.
(See “Fax,” in the e-Manual.)
<Register Favorites>: Stores frequently used
send settings for future use. (See “Fax,” in the
e-Manual.)
* If you want to divide multiple images into
single pages and send each page as a separate
le, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<B&W TIFF (Divide into Pages)>, then press [OK].
If you want to send multiple images as a single
le without dividing them, use [▼], [▲] or
(Scroll Wheel) to select <B&W TIFF (Do Not
Divide into Pages)>, then press [OK].
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
Press (Start).
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the
feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the
specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
9
Press (Start).
–
–
Fax
5-27
Sending Fax Documents
10
Follow the instructions on the display,
then press (Start) once for each
original.
11
When scanning is complete, press the
right Any key to select <Done>.
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent
to the specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
–
–
Basic Methods for Sending PC Faxes
This section describes the ow of sending PC faxes.
Faxing methods may dier depending on the application you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the
application software.
1
Open the document you want to fax from
the application.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
The procedure for displaying the [Print] dialog box
may dier depending on the application you are
using.
3
Select your fax from [Name], then click
[Properties].
The fax name displayed in the fax driver screen
is changed by settings in the [Printers] folder
(or [Printers and Faxes]). (See “Fax,” in the e-
Manual.)
The procedure for displaying the fax driver
screen may dier depending on the
applications you are using.
–
–
4
Congure the required settings in the fax
driver screen, then click [OK].
5
Click [OK].
Fax
5-28
Sending Fax Documents
6
Specify recipient name and fax number in
the [Sending Settings] sheet → click [Add
to Recipient List].
The number of recipients to which you can
send simultaneously depends on the
conditions of cover sheet attachment. For more
information, click [Help] in the bottom right-
hand corner of the fax driver window to view
the online help.
You can select a recipient from the address
book by clicking [Address Book]. (See “Fax,” in
the e-Manual.)
For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, you
can use or edit the address book only if you are
permitted access to the folder where the
address book le is saved (by default, Power
Users and higher have access to the folder). If
you are not permitted access to the folder, log
on as a user who has access to the folder, or
click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address
Book] sheet, and save the address book le in a
folder, such as the [My Documents] folder,
where you have write permission. (See “Fax,” in
the e-Manual.)
–
–
–
7
If you want to attach a cover sheet, select
[Cover Sheet] sheet → specify a format for
the cover sheet.
See “Fax,” in the e-Manual for cover sheet
attachment.
8
Click [OK].
Fax
5-29
Canceling Sending Fax Documents
Canceling Sending Fax Documents
Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel)
during transmission.
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the job you want to cancel, then press the
right Any key to select <Cancel>.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-30
Specifying Destinations
Specifying Destinations
This section describes how to specify a fax destination. You can select a destination stored
in the Address Book or a one-touch, or specify a new destination.
If <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is
set to <On>, you can only specify a destination using <Address Book> or <Log>. If you select <Log>, you can select only
settings stored. (See “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
The destination that you just specied is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted once the document is sent.
If you frequently send documents to the same destinations, store these destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See
“Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book,” on p. 3-2.)
You can specify only one destination at a time in <Enter Fax (New)>.
Specifying a New Fax Number
You can specify a new fax number using – , and (numeric keys).
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼] , [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Enter Fax (New)>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-31
Specifying Destinations
4
Enter a fax number using – , and
(numeric keys).
You can enter up to 120 characters for the fax
number.
Details of each item are shown below.
<Set Destination>: Set the desired
destination.
<Backspace>: Delete the last number entered.
<Pause>: Insert a pause of several seconds in
the fax number you are dialing. If you insert a
pause within the fax number, the letter <p> is
displayed between the numbers. If you insert
a pause at the end of the fax number, the
letter <P> appears.
When dialing an overseas number, insert a
pause after the country code and at the end
of the fax number. (See “Dialing an Overseas
Number (With Pauses),” on p. 5-22.)
<Tone>: Select when you want to directly call
an extension line that is connected to a PBX
(Private Branch Exchange), which accepts only
tone signals. If you select <Tone> and press
[OK], the letter <T> appears.
<Direct Send>: Send documents directly to
the recipient. Select <On>, then press [OK]. If
you do not select direct sending mode,
memory sending mode is used. (See “Direct
Sending,” on p. 5-52.)
<Hook>: Send a fax document manually or
use tone dialing. (See “Calling the Recipient
before Sending Fax Documents (Manual
Sending),” on p. 5-19, or “Switching
Temporarily to Tone Dialing,” on p. 5-21.)
–
–
–
–
–
–
You cannot insert a pause at the beginning of a
number.
If you enter a pause at the end of the number,
the pause is always 10 seconds long.
You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.
If <Conrm Entered Fax No.> in <Restrict the
Send Function> in <System Management Set.>
under <Additional Func.> is set to <On>, you
should enter the fax number again for
conrmation. Enter the fax number you
entered in step 4, then press [OK]. (See
“Security,” in the e-Manual.)
–
–
–
–
5
Use [▼] , [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Set Destination>, then press [OK].
■ If you want to clear the specied
destination:
① Press the left Any key to select <Conrm/
Erase>.
Fax
5-32
Specifying Destinations
② Check the destination you want to clear is
selected, then press the left Any key to
select <Erase>.
③ Specify a destination again.
Using the Address Book
You must specify the destination to send documents. A maximum of 300 (200 for the Color imageCLASS
MF8450c) destinations (including 200 one-touch destinations) can be stored. If you store addresses in the
Address Book, you can easily select them.
To use this feature, you must rst register destinations in the Address Book. (See “Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book,” on
p. 3-2.)
If you use the Color imageCLASS MF8450c, you can register only one-touch destinations in the Address Book.
Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User Interface. (See “Settings from a PC,” in the e-Manual.)
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-33
Specifying Destinations
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired destination, then press [OK].
The icons displayed on the Address Book are:
: Fax
: E-mail
: I-Fax
: File Server
: Group
You can select multiple destinations at a time.
You can use [◀], [▶] to restrict the displayed
range of destinations.
If the register name is longer than 10
characters, the rst 10 characters are displayed
in the name column in the Address Book.
If the registered destination name is longer
than 13 characters, the rst 13 characters are
displayed in the destination column in the
Address Book.
To cancel a selected destination, select the
destination again to clear the check mark.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5
Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
■ If you want to clear the specied
destination:
① Press the left Any key to select <Conrm/
Erase>.
② Check the destination you want to clear is
selected, then press the left Any key to
select <Erase>.
If multiple destinations are specied, clear the
other destinations as necessary.
Fax
5-34
Specifying Destinations
③ Specify a destination again.
Using the One-Touch
You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch.
Follow the procedure below to start a transmission and send a document using one-touch.
To use this feature, you must rst register destinations in one-touch. (See “Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch,” on p. 3-26.)
If you use the Color imageCLASS MF8450c, you can register only one-touch destinations in the Address Book.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Press the right Any key to select <One-
touch>.
Fax
5-35
Specifying Destinations
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired destination, then press [OK].
You can select multiple destinations at a time.
To cancel a selected destination, select the
destination again to clear the check mark.
5
Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
■ If you want to clear the specied
destination:
① Press the left Any key to select <Conrm/
Erase>.
② Check the destination you want to clear is
selected, then press the left Any key to
select <Erase>.
If multiple destinations are specied, clear the
other destinations as necessary.
③ Specify a destination again.
Fax
5-36
Specifying Destinations
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Address Book>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired group which is made up of
several destinations, then press [OK].
You can select multiple destinations at a time.
You can use [◀] or [▶] to restrict the displayed
range of destinations.
To cancel a selected destination, select the
destination again to clear the check mark.
–
–
5
Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
Using the Group Addresses
Group address enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the Address Book or one-touch.
This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can register up to 299 (199
for the Color imageCLASS MF8450c) destinations in one group. You can use the group address from the
Address Book or from the one-touch.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
Specifying a Group from the Address Book●
Fax
5-37
Specifying Destinations
■ If you want to clear the specied
destination:
① Press the left Any key to select <Conrm/
Erase>.
② Check the destination you want to clear is
selected, then press the left Any key to
select <Erase>.
If multiple destinations are specied, clear the
other destinations as necessary.
③ Specify a destination again.
Specifying a Group from the One-Touch●
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Press the right Any key to select <One-
touch>.
Fax
5-38
Specifying Destinations
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired group which is made up of
several destinations, then press [OK].
You can select multiple destinations at a time.
To cancel a selected destination, select the
destination again to clear the check mark.
5
Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
■ If you want to clear the specied
destination:
① Press the left Any key to select <Conrm/
Erase>.
② Check the destination you want to clear is
selected, then press the left Any key to
select <Erase>.
If multiple destinations are specied, clear the
other destinations as necessary.
③ Specify a destination again.
Fax
5-39
Specifying Destinations
1
Place your originals.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
4
Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
5
Press the right Any key to select <Add
Destination>.
Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting)
Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.
A maximum of 301 (201 for the Color imageCLASS MF8450c) destinations can be specied at the same time. (Out of the 301 or 201
destinations, one new destination can be specied.) If you specify a group of several destinations, each destination is counted as a
separate address.
If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.
When <Restrict Seq. Broadcast> is set to <Prohibit Broadcast>, you cannot send the documents to multiple recipients. (See “Security,”
in the e-Manual.)
You cannot cancel to send only one destination out of the multiple destinations.
If you specify e-mail or le server addresses as destinations, <Color/File Format Settings> appears on the Send Settings screen.
However, this setting is disabled when sending faxes.
–
–
–
–
–
Fax
5-40
Specifying Destinations
6
Repeat step 4 and 5 until all the
destinations are set.
Only one new destination can be specied. If
you add destinations, specify them from
Address Book.
You cannot specify the detail settings for each
destination.
–
–
7
Press (Start).
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the
feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the
specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
–
–
9
Press (Start).
10
Follow the instructions on the display,
then press (Start) once for each
original.
11
When scanning is complete, press the
right Any key to select <Done>.
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent
to the specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
–
–
Fax
5-41
Selecting Resolution
Selecting Resolution
You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.
The default setting is <200 × 200 dpi (Fine)>.
The maximum size of an image that you can send at a resolution of 400 x 400 dpi is LGL.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Resolution Settings>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired resolution, then press [OK].
Fax
5-42
Adjusting Density
Adjusting Density
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original manually.
Manual Exposure Adjustment
You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>,
then press [OK].
5
Use [◀], [▶] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust
the density, then press [OK].
Move the indicator to the left to make the
exposure lighter or move it to the right to make
the exposure darker.
Fax
5-43
Adjusting Density
Adjusting Base Color
This mode enables you to erase the background color of the original when scanning. This mode is especially
useful for scanning originals such as catalogs and paper, that have turned yellow from age.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Density/Background Rem. Set.>,
then press [OK].
5
Press the right Any key to select
<Background>.
Fax
5-44
Adjusting Density
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
background setting, then press [OK].
<O>: Does not erase the background color
of the original.
<Background Removal>: If you want to erase
the background color of the original,
following step is not necessary.
<Background Fine Adjust.>: If you want to
make ne adjustments to the density of the
background color, go to the next step.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired color, then press [OK].
8
Use [◀], [▶] or (Scroll Wheel) to
adjust the strength of the color, then
press [OK].
If you adjust the strength of <Yellow>, the levels
of <Red> and <Green> adjust automatically to
the same level as <Yellow>. If you adjust the
strength of <Red> or <Green>, the <Yellow>
level returns to its default level.
–
–
–
9
Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
Fax
5-45
Selecting Image Quality
Selecting Image Quality
You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are
scanning.
The default setting is <Text/Photo>.
Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these
modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the <Photo> mode, the moiré eect (a shimmering, wavy
pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré eect by using the sharpness mode. (See “Adjusting Sharpness,” on p. 5-83.)
If the original is a transparency, select the original type and adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Original Image Quality
Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-46
Selecting Image Quality
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the image quality, then press [OK].
<Text/Photo>: This mode is best suited for
scanning originals containing both text and
photos such as magazines or catalogs.
<Text>: This mode is best suited for scanning
text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn
originals can also be scanned clearly.
<Photo>: This mode is best suited for
scanning photos printed on photographic
paper or photo originals containing halftones
(e.g. printed photos).
–
–
–
Fax
5-47
2-Sided Original
2-Sided Original
You can set the machine to automatically turn over 2-sided originals that are placed in the
feeder, and scan each side separately.
The default setting is <O>.
The 2-sided original mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the direct sending or manual sending mode.
When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as LTRR, make sure to place them
horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of these originals are scanned upside
down.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>,
then press [OK].
If <Book Type Original> or <Calendar Type
Original> has been selected, <2-Sided Originals
Settings> is displayed.
Fax
5-48
2-Sided Original
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the type of original, then press [OK].
<O>: 1-sided originals are scanned.
<Book Type Original>: The front and back
sides of the original have the same top-
bottom orientation.
<Calendar Type Original>: The front and back
sides of the original have opposite top-
bottom orientations.
–
–
–
Fax
5-49
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending)
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed
Sending)
The delayed sending mode enables you to store a send job in memory, and have it sent at a
later time.
The default setting is <O>.
You can reserve up to 70 jobs for the delayed sending. However, the actual number of jobs that can be reserved may be
less than 70, depending on the following conditions:
If multiple documents are being sent at the same time.
If large documents are being sent.
If there are jobs other than delayed sending.
Once the delayed documents are sent, the documents are automatically deleted from memory.
You can check the status or cancel the transmission of jobs for which a preset send time has been specied. (See
“Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents,” on p. 5-138.)
–
•
•
•
–
–
1
Place your originals.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-50
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending)
4
Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Delayed TX Settings>, then press
[OK].
6
Enter the send time using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK].
Enter all four digits of the time (including
zeros), using 24- hour notation.
Examples:
3:50 p.m.→1550
To cancel to enter the time, press the left Any
key to select <Cancel> to return to the
previous screen.
–
–
If you set a time earlier than the current time,
the document will be sent at that time on the
next day.
If you make a mistake when entering the send
time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then
enter another four-digit number.
–
–
7
Press (Start).
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the
feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the
specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
–
–
Fax
5-51
Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending)
9
Press (Start).
10
Follow the instructions on the display,
then press (Start) once for each
original.
11
When scanning is complete, press the
right Any key to select <Done>.
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent
to the specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
–
–
Fax
5-52
Direct Sending
Direct Sending
The machine sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned.
The default setting is <O>.
If you do not select direct sending mode, memory sending mode is used.
With direct sending mode, you can send a document of two or more pages only when using the feeder. You can only
send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.
You can specify only one destination at a time for direct sending mode.
Memory sending is automatically set when using delayed sending or when multiple destinations are specied.
If an error occurs or you cancel transmission in the direct sending mode, you can check how many pages have been sent
to the destination by printing the Activity Report or on the <Log> for fax on the System Monitor screen.
–
–
–
–
–
1
Place your originals.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
4
Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Direct Send Settings>, then
press [OK].
Fax
5-53
Direct Sending
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
<O>: Send after all pages are scanned.
<On>: Send each page as it is scanned.
7
Press (Start).
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the
feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the
specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
–
–
–
–
9
Press (Start).
10
Follow the instructions on the display,
then press (Start) once for each
original.
11
When scanning is complete, press the
right Any key to select <Done>.
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent
to the specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
–
–
Fax
5-54
Favorites
Favorites
You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them as favorites in
memory. You can register up to 4 favorites. This feature is useful for registering frequently
used send settings.
The send settings registered as favorites in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned OFF.
If an address included in a favorites is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the
favorites.
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
Registering Favorites
You can register names for favorites from the Select Send Type Screen or register settings for favorites from
the Send Settings screen.
The currently specied settings are registered for the favorites.
Registering Names for Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen
–
–
–
●
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Press the left Any key to select
<Favorites>.
Fax
5-55
Favorites
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the favorites you want to register, then
press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
Keys registered as favorites are displayed with
icons.
You can also check the settings stored in the
favorites by pressing the left Any key to select
<Details>. Press the right Any key to select
<Done> to return to the previous screen.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
6
Use the software keyboard to enter a
name for favorites, then press the right
Any key to select <Set>.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the
name.
If you press <Set> without entering any
characters, the key name reverts to its current
name (default: M1 to M4).
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
–
–
–
Fax
5-56
Favorites
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Register Favorites>, then press
[OK].
The currently specied settings are registered for
the favorites.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the favorites you want to register, then
press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
Keys registered as favorites are displayed with
icons.
You can also check the settings stored in the
favorites by pressing the left Any key to select
<Details>. Press the right Any key to select
<Done> to return to the previous screen.
Registering Favorites from the Send Settings Screen●
Fax
5-57
Favorites
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Settings>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <No> or <Yes> or <Details>,
then press [OK].
To store the current settings, select <Yes>.
To cancel storing the settings, select <No>.
If you select a key that has settings stored,
select <Yes> to overwrite the previous
settings.
You can check detail settings to select
<Details>.
8
Press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register Name>, then press [OK].
10
Use the software keyboard to enter a
name for favorites, then press the right
Any key to select <Set>.
You can enter up to 16 characters for the
name.
If you press <Set> without entering any
characters, the key name reverts to its current
name (default: M1 to M4).
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
–
–
–
Fax
5-58
Favorites
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel)) to
select <Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Press the left Any key to select
<Favorites>.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the favorites you want to erase, then
press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
Keys registered as favorites are displayed with
icons.
You can only erase a key that has settings
stored in the favorites.
You can also check the settings stored in the
favorites by pressing the left Any key to select
<Details>. Press the right Any key to select
<Done> to return to the previous screen.
–
–
Erasing Favorites
You can erase the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen.
Erasing Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen ●
Fax
5-59
Favorites
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
Erasing Favorites from the Send Settings Screen●
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel)) to
select <Erase>, then press [OK].
Make sure to check the settings rst before
erasing them.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
Key names are not erased. You can change the
name in <Register Name>.
Fax
5-60
Favorites
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Register Favorites>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the favorites you want to erase, then
press the right Any key to select
<Register/Erase>.
Keys registered as favorites are displayed with
icons.
You can only erase a key with settings stored in
the favorites.
You can also check the settings stored in the
favorites by pressing the left Any key to select
<Details>. Press the right Any key to select
<Done> to return to the previous screen.
–
–
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase>, then press [OK].
Make sure to check the settings rst before
erasing them.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
Key names are not erased. You can change the
name in <Register Name>.
Fax
5-61
Favorites
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Press the left Any key to select
<Favorites>.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the favorites you want to recall, then
press [OK].
If you select favorites that already has
specied destinations, the Send Settings
screen appears. You can change the send
settings or add destinations at this time.
You can also check the settings stored in the
favorites by pressing the left Any key to select
<Details>.
If you select favorites that has no specied
destinations, the Select Send Type screen
appears. You can specify destinations.
To cancel all settings and return to the Select
Send Type screen, press (Reset).
–
–
Using the Favorites
If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these
settings in a favorites. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites
containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.
You can recall the settings from the Select Send Type screen.
To use this feature, you must rst register the desired settings in favorites. (See “Registering Favorites,” on p. 5-54.)
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
–
–
Fax
5-62
Favorites
Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites
This mode enables you to check detail settings for favorites.
You can check the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen.
To use this feature, you must rst register the desired document settings and destinations in favorites. (See “Registering Favorites,” on
p. 5-54.)
For details on how to send the documents, see “Basic Methods for Sending Faxes,” on p. 5-17.
Checking Favorites from the Select Send Type Screen
–
–
●
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Press the left Any key to select
<Favorites>.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the favorites you want to check, then
press the left Any key to select <Details>.
You can check detail settings. Press the right Any
key to select <Done> to return to the previous
screen.
Fax
5-63
Favorites
Checking Favorites from the Send Settings Screen●
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
3
Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
display <Register Favorites >, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the favorites you want to check, then
press the left Any key to select <Details>.
You can check detail settings. Press the right Any
key to select <Done> to return to the previous
screen.
Fax
5-64
Job Recall
Job Recall
You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set
in the <Log>, and then send your documents.
The settings such as destinations, scan settings and send settings are stored in a log. The actions below after you change
settings are not recorded in a log:
Pressing the (Start) or (Reset) or (Main Menu).
Activation of the Auto Clear mode.
Turning OFF the machine.
Identical send settings are stored only once in recall memory.
If <Restrict New Addresses> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.> is
set to <On>, the addresses specied from the Address Book are only recalled.
The settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the main power is turned OFF.
If <Restrict Sending From Log> in <Restrict the Send Function> in <System Management Set.> under <Additional Func.>
is set to <On>, you cannot specify a destination using the <Log>. (See “Security,” in the e-Manual.)
–
•
•
•
–
–
–
–
1
Place your originals.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Log>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Mode 1>, <Mode 2> or <Mode 3>, then
press [OK].
You can check the recall settings by pressing the
left Any key to select <Details>.
Fax
5-65
Job Recall
■ If you select a log in which a destination is
stored:
The Send Settings screen appears.
① Conrm the settings.
■ If you select a log in which a destination is
not stored:
The Select Send Type screen appears.
① Specify a destination.
For details about how to specify destinations, see
“Specifying Destinations,” on p. 5-30.
6
Press (Start).
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the
feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the
specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
8
Press (Start).
–
–
Fax
5-66
Job Recall
9
Follow the instructions on the display,
then press (Start) once for each
original.
10
When scanning is complete, press the
right Any key to select <Done>.
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent
to the specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
–
–
Fax
5-67
ECM Transmission
ECM Transmission
ECM (Error Correction Mode) is a mode that automatically detects and corrects fax
transmission errors resulting from telephone line noise. ECM reduces errors when sending
faxes in a poor telephone line condition.
The default setting is <On>.
To communicate using ECM, make sure this mode is activated in both the sending and receiving machines. ECM
transmissions are possible only when this mode is activated in both machines.
Even when ECM is activated, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.
If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to send the documents.
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-68
ECM Transmission
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<ECM TX>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
<O>: Does not use ECM.
<On>: Uses ECM.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Fax
5-69
Adjusting the Pause Time
Adjusting the Pause Time
Some overseas dialing may be aected by the distance or complex routing of connections
when dialing the international access code, country code, and the destination’s telephone
number all at once. In such cases, insert a pause after the international access code. When
the machine dials the number, it will pause where the pause was inserted in the number.
This helps to improve the connection.
The default setting is <2 Seconds>.
You can insert a pause on the screen where you specify the fax number. (See “Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses),”
on p. 5-22.)
Pauses entered at the end of dialed fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-70
Adjusting the Pause Time
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Set Pause Time>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to set
the pause time, then press [OK].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to set
the pause time.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-71
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial)
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is
Busy (Auto Redial)
Auto Redial enables the machine to automatically redial the recipient’s fax number if the
recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs.
Auto Redial can be turned on or o. If you set Auto Redial to on, you can set how many times
the machine redials, the redial interval, and whether the document should be resent due to
an error.
The default settings are as follows:
<Auto-redial>: On
<Redial Times>: 2 Times
<Redial Time>: 2 Minutes
<TX Error Redial>: On
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-72
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial)
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Auto-redial>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
<O>: Does not redial automatically when a
transmission fails. If you select <O> and
press [OK], go to step 15.
<On>: Redials automatically when a
transmission fails. If you select <On> and
press [OK], press [OK] again, then go to the
next step.
–
–
8
Press the right Any key to select
<Option>.
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Redial Times>, then press [OK].
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to set
the number of redial times, then press
[OK].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to set
the number of redial times.
Fax
5-73
Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial)
11
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Redial Time>, then press [OK].
12
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to set
the redial interval, then press [OK].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to set
the redial interval.
13
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Error Redial>, then press [OK].
14
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
<O>: Redialing does not take place if a
sending error occurs.
<On>: Auto Redial takes place if a sending
error occurs.
15
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Fax
5-74
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending
The following redirection problem may happen with certain kinds of fax machines on the
market made by companies other than Canon. The Check Tone Before Sending mode
prevents this rare occurrence from happening.
If you are sending a fax document from your machine at the same time another fax machine
(made by a company other than Canon) is trying to send you a fax, your fax document may
end up being redirected to that fax machine, instead of the original destination you had
intended.
Setting <Check Tone Before Sending> to <On> enables you to avoid such sending problems.
The default setting is <On>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-75
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Check Tone Before Sending>, then press
[OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-76
Standard Send Settings
Standard Send Settings
This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the send function.
Storing the Standard Send Settings
You can store the standard send settings.
The default settings are as follows:
<Resolution Settings>: 200 × 200 dpi
<Density/Background Removal>: 0
<Original Type>: Text
<2-Sided Originals Settings>: O
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-77
Standard Send Settings
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Change Send Func. Mode>, then press
[OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register>, then press [OK].
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired setting item, then press [OK].
You can specify the following settings:
<Resolution Settings>: Adjusts the resolution
of originals. (See “Selecting Resolution,” on
p. 5-41.)
<Density/Background Removal>: Adjusts the
density and the background color of originals.
(See “Adjusting Density,” on p. 5-42.)
<Original Type>: Adjusts the image quality of
originals. (See “Selecting Image Quality,” on
p. 5-45.)
<2-Sided Originals Settings>: Scans two-sided
originals for sending. (See “2-Sided Original,”
on p. 5-47.)
–
–
–
–
You do not need to specify <Color/File Format
Settings>. This setting is disabled when sending
faxes.
9
Press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
10
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-78
Standard Send Settings
Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default
You can restore the standard send settings to their default settings.
All settings including <Color/File Format Settings> are restored to their default settings.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Change Send Func. Mode>, then press
[OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Initialize>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-79
Standard Send Settings
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
9
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-80
Printing the TX Terminal ID
Printing the TX Terminal ID
The TX Terminal ID setting enables you to specify whether the Terminal ID information is
printed at the top of every document that you send via fax. Information such as your fax
number and name is printed, enabling the recipient to know who sent the document.
The default settings are as follows:
<TX Terminal ID>: On
<Printing Position>: Outside
<Tel. Number Mark>: Fax
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-81
Printing the TX Terminal ID
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Terminal ID>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
<O>: Does not print the Terminal ID
information. If you select <O> and press
[OK], go to step 13.
<On>: Prints the Terminal ID information. If
you select <On> and press [OK], press [OK]
again, then go to the next step.
8
Press the right Any key to select
<Option>.
–
–
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Printing Position>, then press [OK].
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Inside> or <Outside>, then press [OK].
<Inside>: The Terminal ID information is
printed inside the image area on the
recipient’s paper.
<Outside>: The Terminal ID information is
printed outside the image area on the
recipient’s paper.
11
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Tel. Number Mark>, then press [OK].
–
–
Fax
5-82
Printing the TX Terminal ID
12
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<FAX> or <TEL>, then press [OK].
<FAX>: “FAX” is printed before the fax number.
<TEL>: “TEL” is printed before the telephone
number.
13
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Fax
5-83
Adjusting Sharpness
Adjusting Sharpness
This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast.
The default setting is <0>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Sharpness>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-84
Adjusting Sharpness
7
Use [◀], [▶] or (Scroll Wheel) to slide
the indicator towards <Low> or <High>,
then press [OK].
<Low>: To scan originals containing printed
images or other halftones, the setting should
be towards <Low>. This setting lessens the
moiré eect (a shimmering, wavy pattern).
<High>: To scan text or lines clearly, the
setting should be towards <High>. This
setting is particularly suited for scanning
blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Fax
5-85
Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation
Specifying What to Display on the Screen for
a Send Operation
This mode enables you to specify what screen is displayed for a send operation. When you
select <Send/FAX> on the Main Menu screen and press [OK], the screen specied here is
displayed for a send operation.
The default setting is <Default Screen>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-86
Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Default Screen for Send>, then press
[OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the initial screen, then press [OK].
<Favorites>: The Set Favorites screen is
displayed on the initial Send screen.
<One-touch>: The One-touch Selection/Clear
screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
<Default Screen>: The Select Send Type
screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
–
Fax
5-87
Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default
Restoring the Send Function Settings to
Their Default
You can restore almost all of the Send Function Settings to their default settings.
You cannot initialize <Register Unit Name> and <Retry Times>. (<Retry Times> is disabled for the fax functions.)
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<TX Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-88
Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Initialize TX Settings>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-89
Send Start Speed
Send Start Speed
This function enables you to change the send start speeds, which is useful when there is
diculty initiating the sending of a document.
The default setting is <33600 bps>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the System Manager ID and System Password
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and
System Password using – (numeric keys),
then press (Log In/Out) to enter the System
Management Settings menu.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send Start Speed>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-90
Send Start Speed
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired start speed, then press [OK].
If your document transmission is slow in
starting, this may mean that the telephone lines
in your area are in poor condition. Select a
slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>,
<14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, <7200 bps>, <4800
bps>, or <2400 bps>.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-91
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides
of Paper
You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to
save paper.
The default setting is <O>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<2-Sided Print>, then press [OK].
«Receiving Faxes»
Fax
5-92
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-93
Reducing a Received Document
Reducing a Received Document
You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the whole
document is printed within the printable area of the paper.
The default settings are as follows:
<Receive Reduction>: On
<RX Reduction>: Auto
<Reduce Direction>: Vertical Only
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-94
Reducing a Received Document
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Receive Reduction>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>.
<O>: Does not reduce received documents.
If you select <O>, press [OK], then go to step
14.
<On>: Reduces received documents. If you
select <On>, press the right Any key to select
<Set>, then go to the next step.
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Reduction>, then press [OK].
–
–
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Auto> or <Fixed Reduction>.
<Auto>: The image is automatically reduced
by a suitable reduction ratio. If you select
<Auto>, press [OK], then go to step 12.
<Fixed Reduction>: The image is reduced by
the reduction ratio set for <Reduce %> in the
next step. If you select <Fixed Reduction>,
press [OK], then go to the next step.
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Reduce %>, then press [OK].
11
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the reduction ratio, then press [OK].
–
–
Fax
5-95
Reducing a Received Document
12
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Reduce Direction>, then press [OK].
13
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Vertical and Horizontal> or <Vertical
Only>, then press [OK].
<Vertical and Horizontal>: The image is
reduced in both the vertical and horizontal
directions.
<Vertical Only>: The image is reduced in the
vertical direction only.
14
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Fax
5-96
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document
Printing Footer Information on a Received
Document
You can set whether the machine prints the date, day, and time received, transaction
number, and page number at the bottom of the received document.
The default setting is <O>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Received Page Footer>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-97
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-98
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is
Low
This function enables you to continue printing your current jobs when the toner is low.
The default setting is <O>.
When <Toner Out Continuous Print> is set to <On>, the printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The
data is erased when the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents again.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Common Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-99
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Toner Out Continuous Print>, then press
[OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-100
ECM Reception
ECM Reception
ECM (Error Correction Mode) is a mode that automatically detects and corrects fax
transmission errors resulting from telephone line noise. ECM reduces errors when receiving
faxes in a poor telephone line condition.
The default setting is <On>.
To communicate using ECM, make sure this mode is activated in both the sending and receiving machines. ECM
transmissions are possible only when this mode is activated in both machines.
Even when ECM is activated, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.
If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to receive the documents.
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-101
ECM Reception
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<ECM RX>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-102
Setting the Incoming Ring Tone
Setting the Incoming Ring Tone
This function enables you to activate the ring alert of the external telephone when the
machine receives a fax or telephone call in the Auto RX or Fax/Tel Auto Switch mode.
The default settings are as follows:
<Incoming Ring>: On
<Ring Times>: 2 Times
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-103
Setting the Incoming Ring Tone
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Incoming Ring>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>.
<O>: Incoming tone does not ring. If you
select <O>, press [OK], then go to step 9.
<On>: Incoming tone rings. If you select
<On>, press [OK], then go to the next step.
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to set
the number of ring times, then press [OK].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to set
the number of ring times.
9
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Fax
5-104
Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception)
Receiving Documents Manually with an
External Telephone (Remote Reception)
You can connect one external telephone to the machine.
When the telephone rings with the machine in the Manual RX mode, you can use the
external telephone to start receiving the document without walking over to the machine.
Activating the Remote Reception
Follow this procedure to turn on the remote reception.
The default settings are as follows:
<Remote RX>: On
<Remo RX ID>: 25
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-105
Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception)
Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception
Follow this procedure to receive fax documents using the remote reception.
Before using the remote reception to receive fax documents, make sure the followings:
An external telephone is connected properly.
Your telephone is set to tone dialing.
–
–
1
When you receive a call, pick up the
external telephone.
2
When you hear a beep, use the numeric
keys to enter the two-digit remote
reception ID to start reception.
If you hear someone on the line, you can start
talking to the other party.
3
When the reception is complete, hang up
the telephone.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Remote RX>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter
a remote reception ID (a combination of
two characters using 0 to 9), then press
[OK].
You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter
a remote reception ID.
The default ID is 25. If you do not want to
change the ID, press [OK] without entering
any numbers.
9
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Fax
5-106
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the
Manual RX Mode
This function enables you to set the machine to switch to document receive mode after
ringing for a specied length of time in the Manual RX mode.
The default setting is <O>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Manual/Auto Switch>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-107
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to set
the amount of time the machine waits
before automatically switching to the
document receive mode, then press [OK].
You can also use – (numeric keys) to set
the time.
9
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-108
Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentied Senders
Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the
Unidentified Senders
This function enables you to reject incoming faxes from senders who do not transmit their
fax numbers (telephone numbers) to your machine. This can be useful when you do not
want to receive direct mail (DM).
The default setting is <O>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<RX Restriction>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-109
Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentied Senders
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
<O>: Does not reject to receive faxes from
unknown senders.
<On>: Rejects to receive faxes from unknown
senders.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Fax
5-110
Receive Start Speed
Receive Start Speed
This function enables you to change the receive start speeds, which is useful when there is
diculty initiating the receiving of a document.
The default setting is <33600 bps>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the System Manager ID and System Password
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and
System Password using – (numeric keys),
then press (Log In/Out) to enter the System
Management Settings menu.
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax Settings>, then press [OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Receive Start Speed>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-111
Receive Start Speed
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired start speed, then press [OK].
If your document reception is slow in starting,
this may mean that the telephone lines in your
area are in poor condition. Select a slower
speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400
bps>, <9600 bps>, <7200 bps>, <4800 bps>, or
<2400 bps>.
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-112
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)
Receiving Documents in Memory without
Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)
Normally a document prints as soon as you receive it. However, there may be occasions
when you want the machine to store all documents in memory until you are ready to print
them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory
lock reception.
The default setting is <O>.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the System Manager ID and System Password
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and
System Password using – (numeric keys),
then press (Log In/Out).
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Memory Lock Settings>, then press [OK].
If the Memory Lock Password has been set,
enter the Memory Lock Password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK].
Fax
5-113
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>.
<O>: Does not use the memory lock
reception mode. If you select <O>, press
[OK], then go to step 12.
<On>: Uses the memory lock reception
mode. If you select <On>, press the right Any
key to select <Option>, then go to the next
step.
7
If you want to set or change a password
for the Memory Lock mode, enter a
password (up to seven digits) using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK].
If you set a password, it will be necessary to
enter the password whenever you want to
change the Memory Lock mode settings, or
cancel the Memory Lock mode.
If you do not want to set the Memory Lock with
a password, press [OK] without entering any
numbers.
–
–
You cannot store a password that only consists
of zeros, such as <0000000>.
If you enter fewer than seven digits, the
machine stores the password with leading
zeros.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered,
<0000002> is stored.
If you make a mistake when entering the
password, press (Clear), then enter the
correct password.
–
–
–
8
Set the machine to print an RX report or
not.
If you want to print an RX report when receiving
documents, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <On>, then press [OK].
If you do not want to print an RX report, select
<O>, then press [OK].
If you want to print an RX report, you need also to
set <RX Report> to <On>. (See “Introduction of
the Machine,” in the e-Manual.)
Fax
5-114
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)
9
Set the time for the machine to enter and
leave the Memory Lock mode.
If you want to specify the Memory Lock Time
settings, use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Specify>, then press [OK].
If you do not want to specify the Memory Lock
Time settings, select <No>, select <Do Not
Specify>, then press [OK]. Go to step 12.
If <Do Not Specify> is selected, the Memory
Lock mode will not start automatically at a
specied time. The machine enters the Memory
Lock mode only when you manually set the
Memory Lock mode to <On> in step 6.
10
Specify the time (in 24-hour/military time
format) for the machine to enter the
Memory Lock mode using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK].
If you make a mistake when entering the time,
press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter
another four digit number.
11
Specify the time (in 24-hour/military time
format) for the machine to leave the
Memory Lock mode using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK].
If you make a mistake when entering the time,
press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter
another four digit number.
If you set the same time for Memory Lock Start
Time and Memory Lock End Time, the machine
will be in the Memory Lock mode through the
entire day.
–
–
12
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-115
Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode
Printing All Documents Stored in the
Memory Lock Reception Mode
Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock
reception mode.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the System Manager ID and System Password
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and
System Password using – (numeric keys),
then press (Log In/Out).
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Communications Settings>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Memory Lock Settings>, then press [OK].
If the Memory Lock Password has been set,
enter the Memory Lock Password using –
(numeric keys), then press [OK].
Fax
5-116
Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O>, then press [OK].
The received documents are printed.
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-117
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
This machine enables you to automatically forward received fax documents to any desired
destination. If a received document matches the specied forwarding conditions, it is
forwarded to the specied destination. Received documents that do not match the
forwarding conditions can also be forwarded to any desired destination.
The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 52 (12 for the Color imageCLASS MF8450c): 50 (10 for
the Color imageCLASS MF8450c) with forwarding conditions and 2 without conditions.
You can set whether to print fax documents with forwarding errors, and whether to store them in memory. (See “Handling
Documents with Forwarding Errors,” on p. 5-131.)
If a forwarding error occurs when all of <Print Image>, <Store Image to Memory>, and <Memory Lock Settings> are set to
<O>, the received documents will be lost.
Specifying Forwarding Settings
This section describes how to register, erase, print, check, and change the forwarding settings.
Storing Forwarding Settings
You can register the forwarding conditions and destinations.
To be able to forward received documents, you need to activate the settings registered here. (See “Activating the Registered Forwarding
Settings,” on p. 5-124.)
–
–
–
●
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the System Manager ID and System Password
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and
System Password using – (numeric keys),
then press (Log In/Out).
«Forwarding Received Faxes»
Fax
5-118
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Register>, then press [OK].
7
Use the software keyboard to enter a
name for the forwarding condition, then
press the right Any key to select <Set>.
For information on using the software keyboard,
see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-119
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the forwarding condition, then press [OK].
The available forwarding conditions are:
<disregard>: Disregards the Fax Number
information as a forwarding condition.
<Does Not Exist>: Forwards the document if
the Fax Number information does not exist.
<equals>: Forwards the document if the Fax
Number information matches all of the
characters entered.
<diers from>: Forwards the document if the
Fax Number information diers from the
characters entered.
<begins with>: Forwards the document if the
Fax Number information begins with the
characters entered.
<ends with>: Forwards the document if the
Fax Number information ends with the
characters entered.
<contains>: Forwards the document if the Fax
Number information contains the characters
entered.
<does not contain>: Forwards the document
if the Fax Number information does not
contain the characters entered.
If you select <disregard> or <Does Not Exist>,
go to step 11.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10
Enter the forwarding criterion (up to 20
characters) using – (numeric keys),
then press the right Any key to select
<Register>.
The following items are also available for
entering the forwarding criterion:
<Space>: Inserts a space between numbers.
<+>: Use to insert a country code. Use <+>
after the country code, and before the fax
number.
<Backspace>: Deletes the last number
entered.
11
Press the right Any key to select <Next>.
–
–
–
Fax
5-120
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
12
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the forwarding destination, then press
[OK].
You cannot select multiple destinations at the
same time. To forward to multiple destinations,
select a group address.
You can use [◀] or [▶] to restrict the displayed
range of destinations.
To be able to select a forwarding destination, it
is necessary to register destinations in the
Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing
Address Book,” on p. 3-2.)
To cancel a selected destination, select the
destination again.
–
–
–
–
13
Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
14
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the le format of the document you want
to forward.
<TIFF>: Forwards the le in the TIFF format.
<PDF>: Forwards the le in the PDF format.
This procedure is not necessary if a fax number
or an I-fax address is specied as the
destination in step 12. Go to step 17.
To view a TIFF le, a software application that
supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for
Windows) is required.
To view a PDF le, Adobe Reader/Adobe
Acrobat Reader is required.
–
–
–
15
Press the right Any key to select <Divide
Pages>.
–
–
Fax
5-121
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
16
If you want to separate multiple images
and send them as separate les, each of
which consists of only one page, use [▼],
[▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>,
then press [OK] twice.
If you want to send multiple images as a single
le without dividing them, use [▼], [▲] or
(Scroll Wheel) to select <O>, then press [OK]
twice.
17
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions
You can store the forwarding destinations of a received document if the forwarding settings of the received
document are not registered, or if the received document does not match all of the forwarding conditions
that you have specied.
Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time, according to the receive type of the received document.
To be able to forward received documents, you need to activate the settings registered here. (See “Activating the Registered
Forwarding Settings,” on p. 5-124.)
●
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
Fax
5-122
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the System Manager ID and System Password
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and
System Password using - (numeric keys),
then press (Log In/Out).
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forward w/o Condition>, then press
[OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-123
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the forwarding destination, then press
[OK].
You cannot select multiple destinations at the
same time. To forward to multiple destinations,
select a group address.
You can use [◀] or [▶] to restrict the displayed
range of destinations.
To be able to select a forwarding destination, it
is necessary to register destinations in the
Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing
Address Book,” on p. 3-2.)
To cancel a selected destination, select the
destination again.
–
–
–
–
9
Press the right Any key to select <Set>.
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the le format of the document you want
to forward.
<TIFF>: Forwards the le in the TIFF format.
<PDF>: Forwards the le in the PDF format.
This procedure is not necessary if a fax number
or an I-fax address is specied as the
destination in step 8. Go to step 13.
To view a TIFF le, a software application that
supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for
Windows) is required.
To view a PDF le, Adobe Reader/Adobe
Acrobat Reader is required.
–
–
–
11
Press the right Any key to select <Divide
Pages>.
–
–
Fax
5-124
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
12
If you want to separate multiple images
and send them as separate les, each of
which consists of only one page, use [▼],
[▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <On>,
then press [OK] twice.
If you want to send multiple images as a single
le without dividing them, use [▼], [▲] or
(Scroll Wheel) to select <O>, then press [OK]
twice.
13
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the System Manager ID and System Password
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and
System Password using – (numeric keys),
then press (Log In/Out).
Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings
You can set whether received documents are forwarded.
●
Fax
5-125
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired forwarding setting, then press
[OK].
Each time you press [OK], the icon status
displayed on the left side of the condition name
is switched.
<>: The received document is forwarded to
the specied destination if it matches the
forwarding conditions.
<>: The received document is not
forwarded to the specied destination even if
it matches the forwarding conditions.
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
–
–
Erasing Forwarding Settings
You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.
●
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the System Manager ID and System Password
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and
System Password using – (numeric keys),
then press (Log In/Out).
Fax
5-126
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the forwarding setting you want to erase.
6
Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase>, then press [OK].
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
9
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-127
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the System Manager ID and System Password
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and
System Password using – (numeric keys),
then press (Log In/Out).
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Print List>, then press [OK].
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Printing Forwarding Settings
You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings.
●
Fax
5-128
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the System Manager ID and System Password
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and
System Password using – (numeric keys),
then press (Log In/Out).
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Settings>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the forwarding setting you want to check
or change.
6
Press the left Any key to select <Menu>.
Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings
You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored.
●
Fax
5-129
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Details/Edit>, then press [OK].
8
Check or change the forwarding settings.
For instructions on changing forwarding
settings, see “Storing Forwarding Settings,” on
p. 5-117.
9
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Sending Documents in Memory to a Dierent Destination
You can redirect the fax documents received in memory to the specied destination.
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Received Job Status>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the job you want to transfer.
Fax
5-130
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
5
Press the left Any key to select <Details>.
6
Press the left Any key to select
<Forward>.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the destination, then press the right Any
key to select <Start>.
You can use [◀] or [▶] to restrict the displayed
range of destinations.
To be able to select a forwarding destination, it
is necessary to register destinations in the
Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing
Address Book,” on p. 3-2.)
–
–
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-131
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
Handling Documents with Forwarding Errors
You can set how the machine handles the documents that failed to be forwarded.
The default settings are as follows:
<Print Image>: On
<Store Image to Memory>: O
If a forwarding error occurs when all of <Print Image>, <Store Image to Memory>, and <Memory Lock Settings> are set to <O>, the
received documents will be lost.
If <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <On>, forwarding error jobs are not printed even if <Print Image> is set to <On>. These jobs are
printed when <Memory Lock Settings> is set to <O >.
–
–
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<System Management Set.>, then press
[OK].
If the System Manager ID and System Password
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and
System Password using – (numeric keys),
then press (Log In/Out).
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Error Settings>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Print Image>, then press [OK].
Fax
5-132
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
<O >: Does not print the image.
<On>: Prints out the image if forwarding fails.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Store Image to Memory>, then press
[OK].
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<O> or <On>, then press [OK].
<O >: Does not store the image.
<On>: Stores the image in memory if
forwarding fails.
–
–
–
–
If you set <Store Image to Memory> to <On>, you
can resend the jobs with forwarding errors to
registered destinations in the Address Book. (See
“Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors,”
on p. 5-133.)
9
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-133
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Error Status>, then press
[OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the job you want to transfer.
5
Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forward>, then press [OK].
Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors
You can resend the fax documents that the machine failed to forward.
Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <Store Image to Memory> is set to <On> in <Forwarding Error
Settings> in <System Management Set.>. (See “Handling Documents with Forwarding Errors,” on p. 5-131.)
Fax
5-134
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the destination, then press the right Any
key to select <Start>.
You can use [◀] or [▶] to restrict the displayed
range of destinations.
To be able to select a forwarding destination, it
is necessary to register destinations in the
Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing
Address Book,” on p. 3-2.)
If the transfer is successful, the document is
erased from memory.
You cannot select a group address for
transferring the document.
–
–
–
–
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-135
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Forwarding Error Status>, then press
[OK].
■ If you want to check the details of
documents with forwarding errors:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the job you want to check.
② Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.
③ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Details>, then press [OK].
Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors
You can check the details of fax documents that the machine failed to forward. You can also erase and print
those documents.
Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if <Store Image to Memory> is set to <On> in <Forwarding Error
Settings> in <System Management Set.>. (See “Handling Documents with Forwarding Errors,” on p. 5-131.)
Fax
5-136
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
④ Check the details of the selected job, then
press the right Any key to select <Done>.
■ If you want to erase a document with a
forwarding error:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the job you want to erase.
② Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.
③ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Erase>, then press [OK].
④ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
To erase multiple documents from memory, select
and erase one document at a time.
■ If you want to print a document with a
forwarding error:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the job you want to print.
② Press the right Any key to select <Menu>.
Fax
5-137
Forwarding Received Fax Documents
③ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Print>, then press [OK].
④ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
To print multiple document, select and print one
document at a time.
4
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-138
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax
Documents in Memory
The System Monitor screen enables you to view and change the status of fax documents in
memory.
Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents
You can check the detailed information of fax documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then
delete unwanted documents as necessary.
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the job whose detailed information you
want to check, then press the left Any key
to select <Details>.
5
Check the details of the selected job.
Fax
5-139
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory
■ If you want to erase the selected job:
① Press the right Any key to select <Done>,
then go to the next step.
■ If you complete this procedure:
① Go to step 8.
6
Make sure that the job you want to erase
is selected, then press the right Any key
to select <Cancel>.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Fax
5-140
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory
Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents
You can check the detailed information of fax documents currently being received or waiting to be received,
then delete unwanted documents as necessary. You can also forward received documents in memory to a
desired destination.
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Received Job Status>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the job whose detailed information you
want to check, then press the left Any key
to select <Details>.
5
Check the details of the selected job.
■ If you want to erase the selected job:
① Press the right Any key to select <Done>,
then go to the next step.
Fax
5-141
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory
■ If you complete this procedure:
① Go to step 8.
You can forward the selected job to another
destination by pressing the left Any key to select
<Forward>. For information on forwarding
received documents, see “Sending Documents in
Memory to a Dierent Destination,” on p. 5-129.
6
Make sure that the job you want to erase
is selected, then press the right Any key
to select <Erase>.
To erase multiple documents from memory,
select and erase one document at a time.
You cannot erase a document that is being
printed.
If you select a document that is being received,
<Erase> changes to <Cancel>, enabling you to
cancel receiving the document.
–
–
–
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Checking/Printing the Fax Log
You can view or print the results of fax transactions that list all faxes sent or received.
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Fax>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Log>, then press [OK].
If <Job Log Display> in <System Management
Set.> is set to <O>, <Log> is not displayed.
Fax
5-142
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the job whose detailed information you
want to check, then press the left Any key
to select <Details>.
5
Check the details of the selected job, then
press the right Any key to select <Done>.
6
If you want to print a list of transaction
results, press the right Any key to select
<Print List>.
If you do not want to print the list, go to step 8.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
E-mail
This chapter describes how to use e-mail functions.
E-mail Chapter
6
Overview of E-Mail Functions .....................................6-2
Introduction to Using E-Mail Functions .....................6-4
Basic E-Mail Operations ..............................................6-5
Sending E-Mail Documents .............................................6-5
Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents ........................6-7
E-mail
6-2
Overview of E-Mail Functions
Overview of E-Mail Functions
You can send scanned documents as e-mail attachments.
You can also print out received e-mail messages.
E-mail
6-3
Overview of E-Mail Functions
E-mail
6-4
Intrduction to Using E-Mail Functions
Introduction to Using E-Mail Functions
This machine enables you to send scanned documents to an e-mail application. Scanned
documents are converted to le formats such as TIFF and are transmitted as an e-mail
attachment to the recipient’s e-mail application.
This section describes the things that you must do before using e-mail functions.
Be sure to set the following items rst:
Network settings
Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network. (See “Network
Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
E-mail settings
Set the e-mail settings to enable your machine to communicate with a mail server. (See “Network
Settings,” in the e-Manual.)
●
●
E-mail
6-5
Basic E-Mail Operations
Basic E-Mail Operations
This section describes the basic procedures for sending e-mails and canceling a
transmission in progress.
Sending E-Mail Documents
This section describes the ow of sending e-mails.
1
Place your originals.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter E-mail (New)>, then press [OK].
5
Use the software keyboard to enter the
e-mail address, then press the right Any
key to select <Set>.
You can enter up to 120 characters for the e-
mail address.
For information on using the software
keyboard, see “Entering Characters,” on p. 1-19.
–
–
E-mail
6-6
Basic E-Mail Operations
6
Make the scan settings you require.
You can specify the following settings:
<Color/File Format Settings>: Species the
color type of originals and the le format for
sending. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<Resolution Settings>: Adjusts the resolution
of originals. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<Density/Background Rem. Set.>: Adjusts the
density and the background color of originals.
(See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Adjusts the
image quality of originals. (See “E-mail,” in the
e-Manual.)
<2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two-
sided originals for sending. (See “E-mail,” in the
e-Manual.)
<Delayed TX Settings>: Species the
transmission time. (See “E-mail,” in the e-
Manual.)
<Send Document Name Settings>: Sets the
name of the document for sending. (See “E-
mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<Subject/Message Settings>: Sets your e-mail
subject and message. (See “E-mail,” in the e-
Manual.)
<Reply-to Settings>: Sets the reply address to
your e-mail. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<E-mail Priority Settings>: Sets your e-mail
priority. (See “E-mail,” in the e-Manual.)
<Register Favorites>: Stores frequently used
send settings for future use. (See “E-mail,” in
the e-Manual.)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
Press (Start).
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the
feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the
specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
9
Press (Start).
–
–
Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents
Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.
E-mail
6-7
Basic E-Mail Operations
10
Follow the instructions on the display,
then press (Start) once for each
original.
11
When scanning is complete, press the
right Any key to select <Done>.
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent
to the specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
–
–
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel)
during transmission.
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/Store>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send Job Status>, then press [OK].
E-mail
6-8
Basic E-Mail Operations
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the job you want to cancel, then press the
right Any key to select <Cancel>.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<No> or <Yes>, then press [OK].
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Printing
7-1
This chapter describes the basic print features.
Overview of Print Functions .......................................7-2
Introduction to Using Print Functions .......................7-4
Printing Documents from Computer .........................7-5
Scaling Documents ......................................................7-7
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet .......................7-9
2-Sided Printing .........................................................7-10
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print) ............7-11
Memory Media Supported by This Machine ..........7-11
Data Supported by This Machine................................7-12
Inserting Memory Media ............................................... 7-13
Removing Memory Media .............................................7-14
Printing from Memory Media ....................................... 7-14
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print
Logs ............................................................................7-27
Checking Print Jobs ......................................................... 7-27
Canceling Print Jobs ........................................................ 7-28
Checking Print Logs ......................................................... 7-29
Printing Chapter
7
Printing
7-2
Overview of Print Functions
Overview of Print Functions
You can print on both sides of paper or use the mode that reduces multiple pages to t onto
one sheet of paper. You can also print out data from a memory medium inserted into the
slot of the machine.
(p. 7-11)
20XX.12.01
20XX.12.02
20XX.12.03
(p. 7-20) (p. 7-21 and 7-24)
Printing
7-3
Overview of Print Functions
(p. 7-9)
(p. 7-10)
(p. 7-7)
Printing
7-4
Introduction to Using Print Functions
Introduction to Using Print Functions
The Canon PCL5c, PCL6, and UFRII LT printer drivers enable users of Microsoft Windows
2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, or Windows Server 2008 to print
from any Windows application and make full use of their Canon printers.
This machine supports two types of printer drivers: Hewlett-Packard’s PCL (Printer Control
Language) printer driver including the PCL5c and PCL6 printer drivers, and Canon’s UFRII LT
(Ultra Fast Rendering II Lite) printer driver.
For installing the driver to send a print job to the machine over a network, see “Network
Connection” in the Starter Guide.
For installing the driver to send a print job directly from your PC to the machine, see “USB
Connection” in the Starter Guide.
PCL
The PCL5c and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software. The PCL5c
printer driver is for color printers and the PCL6 printer driver is for both color and black-and-white printers.
PCL6 is an advanced version of PCL5c and oers superior printing quality and speed.
UFRII LT
Using the UFRII LT printer driver, the various data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer
are appropriately divided between the host PC and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time. The
workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a signicant increase in speed through
optimization.
You can update your printer driver software and acquire information about Canon products on the Canon
home page (http://www.usa.canon.com). Driver software is updated every few months.
The PCL function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c.
The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows that you are using.
If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information
Assist Service in the server PC in order to set up the printer conguration automatically or to use the Job Accounting feature. For
instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see “Set Up Computers and Software” in the Starter Guide.
Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine,
the settings from the printer driver has priority.
●
●
–
–
–
–
Printing
7-5
Printing Documents from Computer
Printing Documents from Computer
This section is the explanation of the basic procedure for printing from the computer
(printer driver). Make sure that the printer driver is installed on your computer. To check if
the driver is installed, see “Set Up Computers and Software,” in the Starter Guide. For
details on the printer driver settings, see Online Help.
Printing methods may dier depending on the applications you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals
provided with the application software.
The display may dier according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver
Information Assist Service in the server PC in order to set up the printer conguration automatically or to use the Job
Accounting feature. For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see “Set Up Computers
and Software” in the Starter Guide.
The machine may not be able to print data such as color photos if the data size of a single page is too large. If such is the
case, reduce the data size by lowering the resolution or by changing the le format.
–
–
–
–
1
Open the document you want to print
from the application.
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
The printer driver screen is displayed.
The procedure to display the printer driver screen
may dier depending on the applications you are
using.
3
Select your printer from [Select Printer],
then click [Page Setup].
Printing
7-6
Printing Documents from Computer
4
Congure the required settings in the
printer driver screen.
5
Click [Print].
Printing begins.
Printing
7-7
Scaling Documents
Scaling Documents
You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size, such as reducing a
document created in LTR size to print on STMT, or enlarging a document created in STMT
size to print on LTR.
There are two methods for scaling a document: select the output size of the document to
scale it automatically, or specify the scaling value manually.
Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document.
Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for
the selected page size.
If you are using an application that enables you to enlarge or reduce the document, congure the settings in the
application.
The display may dier according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the
machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.
–
–
–
–
–
1
Display the [Page Setup] sheet.
2
Select page size of the document you
created in the application from [Page
Size].
Printing
7-8
Scaling Documents
3
Select output size of the document from
[Output Size].
The document is scaled automatically according
to the settings made in [Page Size] and [Output
Size].
4
If you want to increase or decrease the
magnication manually, select [Manual
Scaling] → specify the scaling ratio for
[Scaling].
If the ratio is less than 25% or more than 200%,
the document is printed without scaling on the
paper specied in [Output Size].
5
Click [Print].
Printing
7-9
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
This mode enables you to reduce multiple pages to t onto one sheet of paper. You can
make well-organized documents by editing multiple materials onto one sheet. And you can
cut down print costs by saving papers, and it is also useful for saving space.
Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies depending on the application you are using, do not used it
together with this function. If you do, printing may not be executed correctly.
You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function.
The display may dier according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the
machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.
–
–
–
–
1
Display the [Page Setup] sheet.
2
Select the page layout from [Page
Layout].
3
Select the page order from [Page Order].
4
Click [Print].
Printing
7-10
2-Sided Printing
2-Sided Printing
This mode enables you to make two-sided printing. You can cut down print costs by half
when copying in large quantities.
The page sizes for which two-sided printing is available dier according to printer model. For details, click [Help] in the
bottom right-hand corner of the printer driver window to view the Online Help.
The display may dier according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the
machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.
–
–
–
1
Display the [Finishing] sheet.
2
Select [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style].
3
Select binding edge for the paper
printout from [Binding Location].
4
Click [Print].
Printing
7-11
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
You can print data from a memory medium, such as a SD card by directly inserting it into the
machine and selecting the desired image on the display. You do not need to connect the
machine to your computer. The Direct Print function is available only for the Color
imageCLASS MF9170c/MF9150c.
Memory Media Supported by This Machine
The memory media listed below are compatible with this machine.
USB Memory/Memory cards that can be directly inserted into the slot:
USB Memory–
SD Secure Digital memory card
SDHC memory card
–
–
Compact Flash (CF) Card : supports Type I/II (3.3 V)
Microdrive
–
–
Printing
7-12
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
USB Memory/Memory cards that can be directly inserted into the slot:
Memory Stick
Memory Stick PRO
–
–
Memory cards that can be inserted in the slot using an adapter:
If one of the following memory cards is inserted without an adapter, the card may get stuck in the slot. Be sure to attach an adapter
to the memory card before inserting it into the slot.
miniSD Card*1
–
microSD Card*2
–
Memory Stick Duo*1
Memory Stick PRO Duo*1
–
–
*1 Use the special adapter provided with the card.
*2 Use the SD Card Adapter provided with the card.
Data Supported by This Machine
Note the followings so you can use an appropriate memory media.
Supported le systems of a memory are FAT 16 and FAT 32.
You can not select the data contained in other folder at once.
You can not select a data in a lower level folder.
The following data can be used:
JPEG (DCF/Exif2.21/JFIF)
TIFF
The size of the TIFF image cannot be scaled for printing. If the size of the TIFF image exceeds the size of the selected paper, only the part
that ts on the paper is printed.
–
–
–
–
•
•
Printing
7-13
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
Inserting Memory Media
When a memory medium is inserted into the slot, the access lamp lights up. Do not touch the memory medium at this point because
the machine is accessing to the data in the memory medium. Doing so may damage the machine and the memory media.
When inserted, some memory media protrude from the slot. Do not force them into the slot any further. Doing so may damage the
machine and the memory media.
Make sure that the memory medium is correctly oriented before inserting it into the slot. Forcing an improperly positioned memory
medium into the slot may damage the memory medium and/or the machine.
Depending on the SD card, it may take a few seconds to recognize it.
How to insert a memory medium
Insert only one memory medium into the slot. Conrm that the Access lamp has lit up.
Media Type Inserting Media
USB Memory–
SD Secure Digital memory card
SDHC memory card
Memory Stick
Memory Stick PRO
Memory Stick Duo*1
Memory Stick PRO Duo*1
miniSD Card*1
microSD Card*2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
Printing
7-14
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
Media Type Inserting Media
Compact Flash (CF) Card
Microdrive
–
–
*1 Be sure to attach the memory medium to the special adapter before inserting it into the slot.
*2 Use “SD Card Adapter” Provided with the card.
Removing Memory Media
Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the
data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.
1
Insert a memory medium into the slot.
2
Conrm that the access lamp has lit up.
3
Press (Main Menu).
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Direct Print>, then press [OK].
Printing from Memory Media
1
Make sure that the access lamp is not
blinking, then remove the memory
medium from the slot.
Printing
7-15
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the memory medium that stores the data
that you want to print, then press [OK].
If you want to print an index of all the les in
the selected memory medium, see “Index
Printing,” on p. 7-18.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the folder that contains the data that you
want to print, then press [OK].
If you select data which is saved outside the
folder, skip to step 8.
If you want to select the data from the displayed
images, press the left Any key to change the
display method from <Folder/File Name Display>
to <Image Display>, then press [OK].
You can select the desired data by sorting all
data according to date or extension. If you want
to sort data by date, see “Selecting Files by Date,”
on p. 7-21. If you want to sort data by extension,
see “Selecting Files by Extension,” on p. 7-24.
Printing
7-16
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the data that you want to print, then
press [OK].
In the <Image Display> mode, the screen
below appears. Use [◀], [▶] or (Scroll
Wheel) to select the data that you want to
print, then press [OK].
You can select data by entering the desired
copy quantity with – (numeric keys)
instead of pressing [OK].
You can select multiple data at once from one
folder.
You can not select the data contained in other
folders at once.
–
–
–
8
Press the right Any key to select <Print
Settings>.
In the <Image Display> mode, the screen below
appears.
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired setting, then press [OK].
The followings are the settings that can be
made:
<Color>: Selects full color or B&W.
<Drawer 1>: Selects paper for printing.
<Layout>: Species the layout.
To make this setting, see the detailed procedures
in the next page.
–
–
–
Printing
7-17
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
<Copies>: Selects print quantity.
<Print Date>: Prints the shooting date on
data.
To make this setting, see the detailed procedures
in the next page.
<Print File Name>: Prints the le name on
data.
To make this setting, see the detailed procedures
in the next page.
<Vivid Photo>: Makes green and blue more
lively.
<Brightness>: Adjusts brightness.
<Halftones>: Optimizes data for printing.
The <Halftones> default setting is <Auto>.
<Gradation> is suitable for photos taken with a
digital camera and <Error Diusion> is suitable
for scanned images. In <Auto> mode, printing
from a memory card is automatically processed
with <Gradation> and printing from USB
memory is automatically processed with <Error
Diusion>. For optimal images, select <Error
Diusion> when printing scanned images
stored in memory cards. When printing photos
stored in a USB memory, select <Gradation>.
<Copies> can be set up for each le, but the
other print settings cannot be specied for
each le.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
■ If you select <Layout>:
The print quantity is limited to one.
Only JPEG data can be printed. Even if the
selected les contain TIFF data, only JPEG data
is printed.
The print size is adjusted automatically to t on
one sheet of paper.
The order of the images in the layout cannot
be specied.
This setting cannot be used with two-sided
printing.
A blank space for printing the date and le
name is left below the printed image even if
<Print Date> or <Print File Name> is set to
<O>.
–
–
–
–
–
–
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the layout type, then press [OK].
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>, then press [OK].
Printing
7-18
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
■ If you select <Print Date> or <Print File
Name>:
Only JPEG data can be printed. Even if the
selected les contain TIFF data, only JPEG data
is printed.
The le name can consist of up to 20
characters.
–
–
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press [OK].
10
Press to start printing.
When printing is complete, remove the memory
media.
Do not remove the memory medium when the
access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp
indicates that the machine is accessing the data in
the memory medium. The data may be damaged
if you remove the memory medium at this point.
Index Printing
You can print an index of the data saved on a memory medium.
●
This functions is only available for JPEG. If the selected medium
contains TIFF les, they are not printed.
1
Insert a memory medium into the slot.
2
Conrm that the access lamp has lit up.
3
Press (Main Menu).
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Direct Print>, then press [OK].
Printing
7-19
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
5
Press the right Any key to select <Index
Print>.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired memory medium, then press
[OK].
You can not select multiple memory media or
folders at once.
If you press the right Any key to select <Set>,
only the data saved outside folders will be
printed.
–
–
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired folder, then press the right
Any key to select <Set>.
If the selected folder contains a subfolder, the
les in that folder will not be printed.
The maximum depth of a sub-folder you can
select is 20.
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired setting, then press [OK].
Press [OK] after making each setting.
<Color>: Selects full color or B&W.
<Drawer 1>: Selects paper source for printing.
9
Press (Start).
When printing is complete, remove the memory
media.
Do not remove the memory medium when the
access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp
indicates that the machine is accessing the data in
the memory medium. The data may be damaged
if you remove the memory medium at this point.
–
–
Printing
7-20
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
Selecting All Files in Folder
You can print all les in the selected folder.
●
1
Insert a memory medium into the slot.
2
Conrm that the access lamp has lit up.
3
Press (Main Menu).
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Direct Print>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired memory medium, then press
[OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the folder that contains the les that you
want to print, then press [OK].
7
Press the left Any key to select <Display/
Select>.
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Change File Selection>, then press [OK].
Printing
7-21
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specify Conditions>, then press [OK].
10
Press [OK] to select <Select All>.
11
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired setting, then press [OK].
For details about <Print Settings>, see step 9 in
“Printing from Memory Media,” on p. 7-14.
12
Press (Start) to start printing.
When printing is complete, remove the memory
media.
Do not remove the memory medium when the
access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp
indicates that the machine is accessing the data in
the memory medium. The data may be damaged
if you remove the memory medium at this point.
Selecting Files by Date
You can print only the selected les saved within the specied range of dates or all les on the specied dates.
●
1
Insert a memory medium into the slot.
2
Conrm that the access lamp has lit up.
3
Press (Main Menu).
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Direct Print>, then press [OK].
Printing
7-22
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired memory medium, then press
[OK].
6
Press the left Any key to select <Display/
Select>.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Change File Selection>, then press [OK].
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specify Conditions>, then press [OK].
9
Select the les by specifying dates.
■ If you want to print only the selected les
saved within the specied range of dates:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specied Date>, then press [OK].
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the start date, then press [OK].
③ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the end date, then press [OK].
Printing
7-23
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
④ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the le that you want to print, then press
[OK].
⑤ Press the right Any key to select <Print
Settings>.
■ If you want to print all les on the specied
dates:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specify Date Select All>, then press [OK].
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the start date, then press [OK].
③ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the end date, then press [OK].
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired setting, then press [OK].
For details about <Print Settings>, see step 9 in
“Printing from Memory Media,” on p. 7-14.
11
Press (Start) to start printing.
When printing is complete, remove the memory
media.
Do not remove the memory medium when the
access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp
indicates that the machine is accessing the data in
the memory medium. The data may be damaged
if you remove the memory medium at this point.
Printing
7-24
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
1
Insert a memory medium into the slot.
2
Conrm that the access lamp has lit up.
3
Press (Main Menu).
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Direct Print>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired memory medium, then press
[OK].
6
Press the left Any key to select <Display/
Select>.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Change File Selection>, then press [OK].
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specify Conditions>, then press [OK].
Selecting Files by Extension
You can print only the selected les or all les of the specied extension.
●
Printing
7-25
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
9
Select the les by specifying extensions.
■ If you want to print only the selected les of
the specied extension:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specify Extension>, then press [OK].
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired extension, then press [OK].
③ Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the le that you want to print, then press
[OK].
④ Press the right Any key to select <Print
Settings>.
■ If you want to print all les of the specied
extension:
① Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Specify Ext. Select All>, then press [OK].
② Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired extension, then press [OK].
Printing
7-26
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)
10
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired setting, then press [OK].
For details about <Print Settings>, see step 9 in
“Printing from Memory Media,” on p. 7-14.
11
Press (Start) to start printing.
When printing is complete, remove the memory
media.
Do not remove the memory medium when the
access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp
indicates that the machine is accessing the data in
the memory medium. The data may be damaged
if you remove the memory medium at this point.
Printing
7-27
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Print>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Job Status>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired job, then press the left Any
key to select <Details>.
5
Check the print job status, then press the
right Any key to select <Done>.
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking
Print Logs
You can check the numbers of prints and the print results, or you can cancel a print job
before the printing starts.
Checking Print Jobs
Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is o, there are no jobs in the
memory of the print job status.
Printing
7-28
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs
Canceling Print Jobs
Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is o, there are no print jobs in the
memory.
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Print>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Job Status>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired job, then press the right Any
key to select <Cancel>.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Yes>.
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Printing
7-29
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs
1
Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Print>, then press [OK].
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Log (Printer)>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the desired log, then press the left Any
key to select <Details>.
5
Check the print log, then press the right
Any key to select <Done>.
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Checking Print Logs
Printing
7-30
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs
Scanning
This chapter describes how to use scanner functions.
Overview of Scanner Functions ..................................8-2
Introduction to Using Scanner Functions ..................8-4
For Scanning Documents to a File Server ...................8-4
For Scanning Documents from a Networked
Computer ...............................................................................8-4
Basic Scanning Operations .........................................8-5
Scanning Documents to a File Server ..........................8-5
Scanning Documents to a USB Memory .....................8-7
Scanning Documents from a Networked
Computer ...............................................................................8-9
Scanning Chapter
8
Scanning
8-2
Overview of Scanner Functions
Overview of Scanner Functions
You can transmit scanned documents over the network to your computer.
You also can store scanned documents in a le server or USB memory.
Scanning
8-3
Overview of Scanner Functions
Scanning
8-4
Introduction to Using Scanner Functions
Introduction to Using Scanner Functions
This section describes the things that you must do before using scanner functions.
Be sure to set the following items rst:
For Scanning Documents to a File Server
Network settings
Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network. (See “Network Settings,”
in the e-Manual.)
File server settings
Set the le server settings to enable your machine to communicate with a le server. (See “Network Settings,”
in the e-Manual.)
For Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer
Network settings
Set the network settings to enable your machine to communicate over the network. (See “Network Settings,”
in the e-Manual.)
Color Network ScanGear
Install the Color Network ScanGear scanner driver for using the machine as a scanner. (See the Network
ScanGear Installation Guide on the accompanying CD-ROM.)
●
●
●
●
Scanning
8-5
Basic Scanning Operations
Basic Scanning Operations
This section describes the basic procedures for scanning documents.
Scanning Documents to a File Server
This section describes the basic procedure for sending scanned documents to a computer that acts as a le
server on a network.
1
Place your originals.
2
Press (Main Menu).
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Send/FAX> or <Scan to Store>, then
press [OK].
If you select <Scan to Store>, use [▼], [▲] or
(Scroll Wheel) to select <Store on File Server>,
then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Enter File Server (New)>, then press
[OK].
5
Specify the le server’s address.
For information on how to specify the le
server’s address, see “Scan,” in the e-Manual.
Scanning
8-6
Basic Scanning Operations
6
Make the scan settings you require.
You can specify the following settings:
<Color/File Format Settings>: Species the
color type of originals and the le format for
sending. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Resolution Settings>: Adjusts the resolution
of originals. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Density/Background Rem. Set.>: Adjusts the
density and the background color of originals.
(See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Adjusts the
image quality of originals. (See “Scan,” in the e-
Manual.)
<2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two-
sided originals for sending. (See “Scan,” in the
e-Manual.)
<Delayed TX Settings>: Species the
transmission time. (See “Scan,” in the e-
Manual.)
<Send Document Name Settings>: Sets the
name of the document for sending. (See
“Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Subject/Message Settings>: Sets the
message body text. (See “Scan,” in the e-
Manual.)
<Register Favorites>: Stores frequently used
send settings for future use. (See “Scan,” in the
e-Manual.)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
Press (Start).
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the
feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the
specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
8
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
9
Press (Start).
–
–
Scanning
8-7
Basic Scanning Operations
10
Follow the instructions on the display,
then press (Start) once for each
original.
11
When scanning is complete, press the
right Any key to select <Done>.
Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent
to the specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
–
–
Scanning Documents to a USB Memory
This section describes the basic procedure for storing scanned documents to a USB memory.
1
Insert your USB memory to an
appropriate slot on the right side of the
control panel.
2
Place your originals.
3
Press (Main Menu).
Scanning
8-8
Basic Scanning Operations
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Scan to Store>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Store on Memory Media>, then press
[OK].
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the media you want to store in, then press
the right Any key to select <Set>.
7
Make the scan settings you require.
You can specify the following settings:
<Color/File Format Settings>: Species the
color type of originals and the le format for
sending. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Resolution Settings>: Adjusts the resolution
of originals. (See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Density/Background Rem. Set.>: Adjusts the
density and the background color of originals.
(See “Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
<Original Image Quality Settings>: Adjusts the
image quality of originals. (See “Scan,” in the e-
Manual.)
<2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two-
sided originals for sending. (See “Scan,” in the
e-Manual.)
<Send Document Name Settings>: Sets the
name of the document for sending. (See
“Scan,” in the e-Manual.)
8
Press (Start).
Scanning starts if the original is placed in the
feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the
specied destination when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
–
–
–
–
–
–
Scanning
8-9
Basic Scanning Operations
9
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
the original size, then press [OK].
10
Press (Start).
Scanning starts and the scanned data is sent
to the specied media when scanning is
complete.
To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to
select <Cancel> or press (Stop).
–
–
1
Place your originals.
2
Start Network ScanGear from the
application on your computer.
For details, see “Scan,” in the e-Manual.
3
Make scan settings on the [Main],
[Options], and [Scanner Info] sheets.
For details about the settings in each sheet, refer
to the Online Help for that sheet.
4
Click [Scan].
Scanning starts. When scanning is complete, the
Network ScanGear Main Window closes and the
scanned image is transferred to the application.
During scanning, a scanning progress dialog box
is displayed. To interrupt scanning, click [Cancel].
Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer
This section describes the basic procedure for using Color Network ScanGear to scan over the network.
Scanned documents are transmitted over the network to your computer.
If you are using Color Network ScanGear for the rst time after installing it, the network scanner to be used must be selected with the
ScanGear Tool. For details, see “Scan,” in the e-Manual.
Scanning
8-10
Basic Scanning Operations
Network
9-1
Flowchart for Setting Up Network .............................9-2
What is the Network? ..................................................9-3
Overview of Network Functions .................................9-4
This chapter describes what the network is, what you can do with the network, and what you have to do to use the
machine with the network.
Network Chapter
9
Network
9-2
Flowchart for Setting Up Network
Flowchart for Setting Up Network
Follow the procedures in the owchart below to set up each network function.
Network
9-3
What is the Network?
What is the Network?
In the computer eld, a network is a system of interconnected computers that communicate
with each other. “Internet” and “LAN” are the two most common words used to refer to
networks. The Internet is the vast network to which computers all over the world are
connected. Computers connected to the Internet anywhere in the world can exchange
information with one another. On the other hand, LAN is the abbreviation for “Local Area
Network” and means a network within a limited area (in an oce, for example).
Network
9-4
Overview of Network Functions
Overview of Network Functions
This section describes actions you can perform using the network function.
Settings from a PC
10-1
Settings from a PC
This chapter describes how to use the Remote UI functions.
Overview of Remote UI .............................................10-2
Starting the Remote UI..............................................10-4
Settings from a
PC Chapter
10
Settings from a PC
10-2
Overview of Remote UI
Overview of Remote UI
Remote UI enables you to check the machine’s status and manage the machine’s functions
from a computer on the network using a web browser. Using the computer keyboard, the
management process, such as entering addresses to the address book will be easier.
Settings from a PC
10-3
Overview of Remote UI
Checking the Device
Information from a computer
The Remote UI enables you to check
the device information. Accessing to
the device information from the
distant place provides you with easy
device management.
For details, see “Checking Device
Status and Information” in the e-
Manual.
Managing jobs from a
computer
The Remote UI enables you to manage
print jobs and view job logs.
Accessing to the print job information
from the distant place provides you
with easy job management.
For details, see “Job Management” in
the e-Manual.
Editing the Address Book
from a computer
The Remote UI enables you to make
additions and changes to each item of
the address book. You can use the PC
keyboard, so entering a lot of
addresses to the address book will be
easier.
For details, see “Managing the
Address Book” in the e-Manual.
Setting/registering from a
computer
The Remote UI enables you to specify
the machine’s system settings. You can
specify the various custom system
settings more easily and speedy.
For details, see “Customizing System
Settings” in the e-Manual.
By using remote UI you can set and conrm following functions.
Settings from a PC
10-4
Starting the Remote UI
Starting the Remote UI
To start the Remote UI, follow the procedure described below.
1
Prepare the Network.
Set up the machine for use in a network, then
connect the machine and the computer to your
network router or a hub.
For details, see “Setup Computers and Software,”
in the Starter Guide.
2
Start the web browser.
3
Enter the IP address of the machine in
[Address] or [Location], then press [Enter]
on the keyboard.
For details on how to check the IP address, see
“Setting and Checking the IP Address,” in the e-
Manual.
The Remote UI screen appears.
4
Enter the required data.
The required data dier depending on the
authentication mode you are using.
■In case of default settings:
① Select [System Manager Mode] or [End-User
Mode].
Settings from a PC
10-5
Starting the Remote UI
② For System Manager Mode, click OK. For
End-User Mode, enter the User Name and
click OK.
■ In case system manager ID and password is
set:
① Select [System Manager Mode] or [End-User
Mode].
② For System Manager Mode enter the
System Manager ID and the Password, and
click OK. For End-User Mode, enter the User
Name and click OK.
■ For Department ID Management mode:
① Enter the Department ID and Password, and
click OK.
Settings from a PC
10-6
Starting the Remote UI
■ For User Management mode:
① Enter the User ID and Password, and click
OK.
If no password is set, you can log on without
entering a password.
5
Operate the Machine.
Now you can manage the machine on the web
browser.
For details, see “Settings from a PC,” in the e-
Manual.
Maintenance
This chapter describes how to perform routine cleaning operations, and replace toner cartridges.
Maintenance Chapter
11
Cleaning the Machine ...............................................11-2
Exterior ................................................................................. 11-2
Interior .................................................................................. 11-3
Scanning Area .................................................................... 11-4
Replacing the Toner Cartridges ................................11-7
When a Message Appears ............................................. 11-7
Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One .... 11-8
Recycling Used Cartridges ......................................11-13
The Clean Earth Campaign ..........................................11-13
U.S.A. PROGRAM .............................................................11-14
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME .......11-17
Transporting the Machine ......................................11-19
11-2
Cleaning the Machine
Maintenance
Cleaning the Machine
If the original is not copied clearly, clean the machine. For high-quality printouts, we
recommend cleaning the machine once or twice a month.
Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other solvents for cleaning. Doing so may result in damage to the plastic
parts.
Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for cleaning; they can stick to the components or generate
static charges.
Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around the base of the power plug’s metal
pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for
a long period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp.
This may cause a short circuit and result in a re.
You cannot send or receive documents when the main power switch is turned o or the power cord is disconnected.
If the main power switch is turned ON, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes
after the power cord has been disconnected.
Exterior
Clean the exterior of the machine.
–
–
–
–
–
–
1
Turn OFF the main power switch and
disconnect the power cord.
2
Wipe the machine’s exterior with a clean,
soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water
or diluted dishwashing detergent
solution.
3
Wait for the machine to dry, then
reconnect the power cord and turn ON
the main power switch.
11-3
Cleaning the Machine
Maintenance
Interior
Clean the machine’s print area periodically to prevent toner powder and paper dust from accumulating inside.
Cleaning the Fixing Unit
If black streaks appear on printed output, the xing unit may be dirty. Also, you should use the Fixing Unit
Cleaning procedure every time the toner cartridge is replaced. Print the cleaning pattern on LTR paper for
cleaning the xing unit.
As cleaning paper, LTR or A4 paper must be loaded in the paper drawer or the stack bypass tray.
Cleaning the xing unit takes approximately 60 seconds.
●
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func>.
3
Use [▼], [▲], or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then
press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲], or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Fixing Unit Cleaning>, then press
[OK].
11-4
Cleaning the Machine
Maintenance
5
Conrm that <Start Cleaning> is
displayed, then press [OK].
Printing starts.
Discard the cleaning paper after use.
The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please
wait until it is completed.
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
Scanning Area
Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies or faxes to be sent.
Cleaning the Platen Glass
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder by following the procedure below.
When cleaning the machine, rst turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord. Failure to observe these steps may
result in a re or electrical shock.
●
1
Open the feeder.
2
Clean the platen glass and the underside
of the feeder with a cloth dampened with
water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry
cloth.
11-5
Cleaning the Machine
Maintenance
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may
tear the document or damage the machine.
3
Close the feeder.
Cleaning the Feeder Automatically
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder, clean the rollers of
the feeder.
Use LTR or A4 paper as cleaning paper.
It takes approximately 30 seconds to clean the feeder.
●
–
–
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func>.
3
Use [▼], [▲], or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Adjustment/Cleaning>, then
press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲], or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Feeder Cleaning>, then press
[OK].
11-6
Cleaning the Machine
Maintenance
5
Place 10 sheets of blank paper into the
feeder.
6
Conrm that <Start> is displayed, then
press [OK].
The display returns to the Adjustment/Cleaning
screen.
Discard the cleaning paper after use.
The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please
wait until it is completed.
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
11-7
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
Maintenance
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
This section describes how to replace or handle the toner cartridges and precautions on
storing them.
When a Message Appears
Toner cartridges are consumable products. If the toner is running out during printing, a message appears in
the display.
Message When it is Displayed Contents and Remedies
Prepare a new toner cartridge. (XXX*)
* XXX indicates either “Black”,
“Yellow”, Cyan”, or “Magenta”.
The toner is running low. It is recommended that you replace
the toner cartridge before printing
a large amount of data.
–
Replace the toner cartridge. (XXX*)
* XXX indicates either “Black”,
“Yellow”, ”Cyan”, or “Magenta”.
When a toner cartridge needs to be
replaced soon.
Replace the toner cartridge of the
indicated color with a new one.
It is recommended that you replace
the toner cartridge before printing
a large amount of data.
–
–
11-8
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
Maintenance
Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One
If any of the following messages appears, replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color with a new one.
<Replace the toner cartridge. (Black)>: Replace the black toner cartridge.
<Replace the toner cartridge. (Yellow)>: Replace the yellow toner cartridge.
<Replace the toner cartridge. (Cyan)>: Replace the cyan toner cartridge.
<Replace the toner cartridge. (Magenta)>: Replace the magenta toner cartridge.
–
–
–
–
1
Open the front cover by using the handle
(A).
The toner cartridges are installed in order of black,
yellow, cyan, and magenta from the top as shown
in the gure.
2
Place paper (LTR size paper is
recommended) on the transfer belt of the
delivery feeder unit (A) as shown in the
gure and be sure that they do not move
out of place.
11-9
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
Maintenance
When installing or removing the toner
cartridges, be sure to place paper on the
transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit to
protect the belt.
Do not place any object on or touch the
transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The
transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit has a
self cleaning function, therefore, do not clean
the belt even when the toner is on it. If the
delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt is
damaged, this may result in misfeeds or
deterioration in print quality.
–
–
3
Hold the blue tabs on the both sides of
toner cartridge, and pull it horizontally.
Do not touch the high-voltage contact (A) or the
electrical contacts (B), as this may result in
damage to the printer.
4
Take the new toner cartridge out of the
protective bag after taking it out of the
package.
There is a cut near the arrow on the protective
bag, so you can open it by hand. However, if you
cannot open it by hand, use scissors to open the
protective bag so as not to damage the toner
cartridge.
11-10
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
Maintenance
5
Gently rock the toner cartridge several
times to evenly distribute the toner
inside.
6
Place the toner cartridge on a at surface,
fold back the tab of the sealing tape (A)
located at left side of the toner cartridge.
7
Remove the sealing tape (approx. 18 7/8
inch long) gently by hooking your ngers
into the tab and pulling it out straight in
the direction of the arrow.
Do not pull the seal out at an angle.
Do not open the drum protective shutter (A).
If the sealing tape is pulled out forcefully or
stopped at midpoint, toner may spill out. If the
toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them
immediately with cold water and immediately
consult a physician.
If toner is adhered to the removed seal, be
careful not to dirty your hands or clothing by
touching it.
If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching
the toner, wash them immediately in cold
water. Do not use hot water. Doing so may
cause the toner to set permanently.
–
–
–
–
11-11
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
Maintenance
8
Hook your nger into the tab and remove
the packing materials (A) located at right
side of the toner cartridge.
9
Hold the toner cartridge properly by the
blue tabs on the both sides with the
arrowed side facing up.
Do not hold the toner cartridge in a manner that
is not directed in this procedure.
10
Align (A) of the toner cartridge that you
want to replace with the slots (B) to which
the label of the same color is attached,
then insert the cartridge until it stops.
11
After removing all the packing materials
on the each toner cartridges and
installing the cartridges, remove the
paper on the transfer belt of the delivery
feeder unit.
When removing the paper, be careful not to
touch or damage the transfer belt of the delivery
feeder unit.
11-12
Recycling Used Cartridges
Maintenance
12
Close the front cover.
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
If the front cover does not close properly, do
not force it to close. Open the cover and make
sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the
machine.
–
–
11-13
Recycling Used Cartridges
Maintenance
Recycling Used Cartridges
Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges called
“The Clean Earth Campaign”. This program preserves precious natural
resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the used cartridges
that are of no further use, to remanufacture new cartridges which, at the
same time, keeps the environment cleaner by reducing landll waste.
Complete details concerning this program are enclosed in each Cartridge
box.
The Clean Earth Campaign
THE Canon CARTRIDGE RECYCLING PROGRAM
The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program fullls the rst initiative of Canon’s Clean Earth Campaign, which
supports four critical environmental areas:
Recycling in the Workplace
Conserving Environmental Resources
Scientific Research and Education
Encouraging Outdoors Appreciation
The remaining “Clean Earth” initiatives are supported in the U.S. through sponsorships of the National Park
Foundation, the National Wildlife Federation, and The Nature Conservancy and in Canada through donations
to the World Wildlife Fund Canada and The Nature Conservancy of Canada.
Since its inception, The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program has collected huge amount of cartridges that
otherwise would have been discarded into landlls or similar facilities.
Instead, this rapidly growing program returns used cartridges to the manufacturing process, thus conserving
an array of resources.
Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy. When your cartridge is of no further use, simply follow
the instructions detailed for U.S. or Canadian residents.
We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program.
Working together we can make a signicant contribution to a cleaner planet.
●
●
●
●
●
11-14
Recycling Used Cartridges
Maintenance
Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled.
You are not entitled to a tax deduction or rebate for the return of empty cartridges.
This program may be modified or discontinued without notice.
U.S.A. PROGRAM
Packaging
■Option A-1: Single Box Return
Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge’s
box.
Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.
●
●
●
●
●
●
11-15
Recycling Used Cartridges
Maintenance
■Option B: Volume Box Return
We encourage you to use this option as a more ecient way to ship cartridges.
Place as many cartridges as possible into one box.
Carefully seal the box with tape;
or
Call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive your free eight cartridge collection box.
■Option A-2: Multiple Box Return
We encourage you to use this option as a more ecient way to ship cartridges.
Complete Option A-1.
Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape.
Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specications.
Maximum weight = 70 lb. (31.8 kg)
Maximum length = 108 in. (2,743 mm)
Maximum girth (length + 2 x width + 2 x height) = 130 in. (3,302 mm)
If your shipment exceeds the above limits, please call 1-800-OK-Canon for special shipping information.
Please Note:
Do not send defective cartridges for replacement.
Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or
service facility as provided in the warranty.
●
●
●
●
11-16
Recycling Used Cartridges
Maintenance
Shipping
Apply the UPS authorized returning label provided in this guide.
Residents of Alaska and Hawaii: Do not use the UPS authorized returning label. For Alaska and Hawaii
Canon set up alternative mail service with the U.S. Postal Service.
Please call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive U.S. Postal Service merchandise returning label.
Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery; (UPS may charge a
fee for customers who call UPS to pick up a cartridge shipment if they do not already have a delivery
scheduled.)
or
Take the shipment to your local UPS receiving point.
●
●
●
11-17
Recycling Used Cartridges
Maintenance
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME
■Option A: Single Box Return
Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge’s
box.
Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.
Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon’s labels are specially
marked so that Canon pays the postage.
Deposit your empty cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local Canada Post outlet or
franchise.
■Option B: Volume Box Return (eight or more cartridges)
We encourage you to use this option as a more ecient way to ship cartridges.
Call 1-800-667-2666 to receive your free Canon collection box kit.
The collection box can accommodate eight individual cartridge boxes.
Place your eight individually packaged boxes of empty cartridges into the Canon collection box. Seal the
box.
Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure.
Canon’s labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.
Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise. Customers who hold a Commercial pick-up agreement
with Canada Post may have their collection box picked up.
Working to preserve endangered species is a long-standing Canon interest.
To this end, for every cartridge collected, Canon Canada donates $1, shared equally between World Wildlife
Fund Canada and the Nature Conservancy of Canada. This donation is utilized in Canada.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
11-18
Transporting the Machine
Maintenance
For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada, please call or write to Canon.
1-800-667-2666
Canon Canada Inc.
Corporate Customer Relations
6390 Dixie Road
Mississauga, ON L5T 1P7
●
11-19
Transporting the Machine
Maintenance
Transporting the Machine
Follow this procedure to avoid vibration damage to the machine when transporting it over a
long distance.
1
Turn OFF the main power switch.
2
Disconnect the power cord and all the
cables from the machine.
① Disconnect the power cord from the
machine.
② Disconnect the LAN and USB cables, if any
are connected to the machine.
③ Disconnect the telephone cable and other
cables from the machine if you connect
your own telephone to the machine.
3
If you are using the output tray extension,
fold the paper stopper, and then push the
output tray extension into the machine.
11-20
Transporting the Machine
Maintenance
4
If you are using the stack bypass tray, fold
stack bypass tray extension, push back
the auxiliary tray into place, and then
close the stack bypass tray.
5
Pull out the paper drawer gently.
6
Hold the paper drawer with both hands
and remove it from the machine.
Remove the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 from the
machine if it is installed. To remove the Cassette
Feeding Unit-AC1, perform the installation
procedure in reverse. (See the sheet “Cassette
Feeding Unit-AC1 Setup Instruction.”)
11-21
Transporting the Machine
Maintenance
7
Pick up the machine using the hand grips
on the left, right and back of the machine.
Be sure at least two people carry the machine.
Do not lift the machine by any of its
attachments. Dropping the machine can cause
personal injury.
If you have a back problem, make sure to check
the weight of this machine before carrying.
(See “Specications,” on p. 14-2.)
If you need to install the Cassette Feeding Unit-
AC1 in the machine, place the feeder at the
installation site rst, and then transport the
machine to the site. For directions on how to
install the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1, see the
sheet “Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 Setup
Instruction.”
–
–
–
11-22
Transporting the Machine
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to respond to paper and original jams, as well as to error messages.
Troubleshooting Chapter
12
Clearing Jams .............................................................12-2
Original Jams ......................................................................12-3
Paper Delivery Tray ...........................................................12-5
Duplex Unit ......................................................................... 12-6
Stack Bypass Tray .............................................................. 12-8
Paper Drawer 1 ................................................................12-10
Optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) ...............12-11
Inside of the Machine ....................................................12-13
Fixing Unit .........................................................................12-16
Back Cover .........................................................................12-18
When the Message Does Not Disappear ................12-19
If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed
Correctly ...................................................................12-22
Error Messages.........................................................12-25
Error Codes ...............................................................12-30
If <Set the correct paper. > is displayed .................12-36
Reloading the Paper ......................................................12-36
Changing the Paper Size Setting ..............................12-36
If a Power Failure Occurs .........................................12-39
If You Cannot Solve a Problem ................................12-40
Customer Support (U.S.A.) ...........................................12-40
Customer Support (Canada) .......................................12-40
12-2
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
Clearing Jams
When <Check the originals.>, <The paper has jammed.>, or <Remove the jammed paper
from...> appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the machine. The screen
indicating the location of the paper jam and the procedure for clearing the paper jam
appears on the display, and it remains there until the paper jam is entirely cleared.
Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:
Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use. (See “Paper
Requirements,” on p. 2-7.)
Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from the inside of the machine.
Fan and tap the paper stack on a at surface before loading it in the machine.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other
metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
The xing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. Make sure the xing unit is completely cool
before removing the jammed paper. Touching the xing unit when it is still hot may result in burns.
If loose toner comes into contact with your skin or clothing, wash with cold water. Warm water will set the toner.
When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the
toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
When removing jammed original or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the original or paper.
After clearing all paper jams, remove your hands from the machine immediately. Even if the machine is not in operation,
your hands, hair, or clothing may get caught in the feed rollers, which could result in personal injury or damage if the
machine suddenly starts printing.
Remove jammed paper while the power of the printer is on. If the power is turned o, the data being printed will be
deleted. When you remove the xing unit to remove jammed paper, however, the data being printed will be deleted
because you have to turn the machine OFF.
Applying excess force may result in tearing paper or damaging the parts in the printer. When removing jammed paper,
pull out the paper in the most appropriate direction, judging from the position of the paper.
Applying excess force may result in tearing paper or damaging the parts in the printer. When removing jammed paper,
pull out the paper in the most appropriate direction, judging from the position of the paper.
Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit. The transfer belt of the delivery feeder
unit is supplied with a function that cleans itself, therefore, do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it. If the
delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality.
If the error message still remains after having removed the jammed paper without handling the front cover or top cover,
open and close the front cover to reset the machine.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
12-3
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
1
Open the feeder cover.
2
Hold both sides of any jammed original
and gently pull it out.
Do not force a jammed original out of the
machine.
If the jammed original cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
3
Open the inner cover, holding it by its
front tab (A).
4
Lift the release lever (A) until it clicks into
place.
Original Jams
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed original from the
feeder. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
12-4
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
5
Remove the jammed original.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine
as it may tear.
6
Return the release lever (A) to its original
position.
7
Close the inner cover.
8
Close the feeder cover.
9
Load the original in the feeder again.
12-5
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
1
Hold both sides of any jammed paper and
gently pull it out.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
If unxed toner is on the removed paper, it may
adhere to the paper to be printed next.
2
Open and close the front cover to reset
the machine.
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it
before opening the front cover. Use the handle
(A) to gently close the front cover.
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
Paper Delivery Tray
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the output
tray. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
12-6
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
1
Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is
locked.
2
Open the inner cover, holding it by its
center tab (A).
3
Hold both sides of any jammed paper and
gently pull it out.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
4
Close the inner cover.
Duplex Unit
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the duplex
unit. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
12-7
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
5
Lower the scanning platform.
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
6
Open and close the front cover to reset
the machine.
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it
before opening the front cover.
Close the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
12-8
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
1
Hold both sides of any jammed paper and
gently pull it out.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
2
Close the stack bypass tray.
Stack Bypass Tray
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the stack
bypass tray. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
12-9
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
3
Open and close the front cover to reset
the machine.
Close the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
12-10
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
Paper Drawer 1
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the paper
drawer. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
1
Using the handle, pull the paper drawer
half way out.
2
Push downward on the jammed paper as
you remove it.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
Doing so may result in the feed roller coming o.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
3
Gently push the paper drawer back into
the machine until it clicks into place in
the closed position.
4
Open and close the front cover to reset
the machine.
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it
before opening the front cover.
Close the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
12-11
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
1
Using the handle, pull the paper drawer
half way out.
2
Push downward on the jammed paper as
you remove it.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
Doing so may result in the feed roller coming o.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
Optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2)
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the
optional paper drawer. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
12-12
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
3
Gently push the optional paper drawer
back into the machine until it clicks into
place in the closed position.
4
Open and close the front cover to reset
the machine.
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it
before opening the front cover.
Close the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
12-13
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
1
Open the front cover
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it
before opening the front cover.
Open the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
When removing jammed paper, be sure to
place paper on the transfer belt of the delivery
feeder unit to protect the belt.
Do not place any object on or touch the
transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The
transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit is
supplied with a function that cleans itself,
therefore, do not clean the belt even when the
toner is on it. If the delivery feeder unit is
broken or transfer belt is damaged, this may
result in misfeeds or deterioration in print
quality.
–
–
Inside of the Machine
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the inside
of the machine. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
12-14
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
2
Hold both sides of any jammed paper and
pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
Gently remove the jammed paper in the
direction of the arrow to prevent unxed toner
from spilling.
When removing the paper, be careful not to
touch the transfer belt of the delivery feeder
unit or toner cartridge.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the
machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
–
–
–
3
Hold both sides of any jammed paper and
gently pull it out in the direction of the
arrow.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
4
Hold both sides of any jammed paper and
gently pull it out in the direction of the
arrow.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
5
Press the lock release buttons (A) on the
duplex print transport guide and lift the
duplex print transport guide (B).
If you are not performing two-sided printing,
proceed to the next step.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
12-15
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
6
Remove the jammed paper while lifting
the duplex print transport guide.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
7
Lower the duplex print transport guide
until it clicks into its original position.
Make sure that the duplex print transport guide is
closed completely. If the duplex print transport
guide is not closed completely, this may result in
misfeeds or paper jams.
8
Hold the tab (A) of the delivery feeder
unit, and lift the delivery feeder unit until
it clicks.
If the delivery feeder unit comes o, see “If the
Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly,” on
p. 12-22.
9
Remove the jammed paper in the
direction of the arrow.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
12-16
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
1
Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is
locked.
2
Open the xing cover, holding it by its left
tab (A).
Fixing Unit
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the xing
unit. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
10
Close the front cover.
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
12-17
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
The xing unit and its surroundings inside the
machine are hot during use. Make sure the xing
unit is completely cool before removing the
jammed paper. Touching the xing unit when it is
still hot may result in burns.
3
Hold both sides of any jammed paper and
gently pull it out.
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily,
proceed to the next step.
4
Close the xing cover.
5
Lower the scanning platform.
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
12-18
Clearing Jams
Troubleshooting
1
Open the back cover.
2
Hold both sides of any jammed paper and
gently pull it out.
3
Close the back cover.
4
Open and close the front cover to reset
the machine.
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it
before opening the front cover.
Close the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
Back Cover
If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the LCD display, remove the jammed paper from the
back side of the machine. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.
12-19
When the Message Does Not Disappear
Troubleshooting
When the Message Does Not Disappear
When the message that indicates a paper jam occurring inside the top cover does not
disappear even after the jammed paper is removed, this indicates that the jammed paper
still remains in the xing unit. Remove the xing unit using the following procedure to
remove the jammed paper.
The xing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. Make sure the xing unit is completely cool before
removing the jammed paper. Touching the xing unit when it is still hot may result in burns.
When you remove the xing unit, you have to turn the main power switch OFF.
Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord is disconnected.
If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes
after the power cord has been disconnected.
–
–
–
–
1
Turn OFF the main power switch and
disconnect the power cord.
2
Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is
locked.
12-20
When the Message Does Not Disappear
Troubleshooting
3
Grasp and pull the tab (A) on the left side
of the top cover to open the xing cover.
4
Move the control panel into the upright
position.
5
Press the blue tabs (A) and hold the xing
unit by the parts indicated with arrows.
The xing unit and its surroundings inside the
printer are hot during use. Make sure the xing
unit is completely cool before removing the
jammed paper. Touching the xing unit when it is
still hot may result in burns.
6
Remove the xing unit with both hands.
7
Place the xing unit on a at surface.
8
Open the xing unit cover.
12-21
When the Message Does Not Disappear
Troubleshooting
9
Remove the jammed paper.
10
Install the xing unit.
11
Close the xing cover.
12
Lower the scanning platform.
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
13
Reconnect the power cord and turn on
the main power switch.
12-22
If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly
Troubleshooting
If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed
Correctly
If the delivery feeder unit is not installed correctly, an error code <E00012> appears on the
display. Follow the procedure below to install the delivery feeder unit correctly. If the error
code does not disappear after the delivery feeder unit is installed correctly, contact Canon
Customer Care Center.
You have to remove the delivery feeder unit and re-install the delivery feeder unit correctly.
When you remove the delivery feeder unit, you have to turn the main power switch OFF.
Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord is disconnected.
If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes
after the power cord has been disconnected.
–
–
–
–
–
1
Turn OFF the main power switch and
disconnect the power cord.
Make sure that the Processing/Data Indicator is
turned o and check the display to conrm that a
job is not being processed.
2
Open the front cover.
If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it
before opening the front cover.
Open the front cover gently holding the handle
(A).
12-23
If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly
Troubleshooting
3
Push the levers (A) on both sides of the
delivery feeder unit and remove the
delivery feeder unit gently, holding it by
the tabs (B).
Do not place any object on or touch the
transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The
transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit is
supplied with a function that cleans itself,
therefore, do not clean the belt even when the
toner is on it. If the delivery feeder unit is
broken or transfer belt is damaged, this may
result in misfeeds or deterioration in print
quality.
–
4
Install the delivery feeder unit so that the
protrusions (A) of the delivery feeder unit
t into the guides (B) and click into place.
5
Conrm that the triangle marks (A) on the
delivery feeder unit are aligned with the
triangle marks (B) on the machine.
12-24
If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly
Troubleshooting
6
Close the front cover
Close the front cover gently holding the handle.
Be careful not to get your ngers caught.
7
Reconnect the power cord and turn on
the main power switch.
12-25
Error Messages
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
When a message appears on the display, please refer to the examples of error messages in
the table below.
Message Description Action
Avail. Mem. This message shows the percentage
of the memory currently available.
This message is displayed when
you set the originals in the feeder in
Fax/Send mode.
If you need more space, wait for the
machine to send any documents in
memory. Also print, send, or delete any
documents stored in memory.
Cannot find server. The IP address that the machine
should connect to cannot be
determined.
Check the DNS (Domain Name
System) Server Settings in TCP/IPv4
or v6 in Network Settings in System
Management Set (from the Additional
Functions screen).
Cannot use this function at this
time.
You have specified the group
addresses when the line is off the
hook.
– Specify the recipient other than group
addresses.
–
You have specified the One-touch
that has registered with other than
fax number when the line is off
the hook.
– Make sure that the line is
disconnected.
–
The registered group is
already nested for three levels
of subgroups (e.g., a group
registered in a group in a group in
a group).
– You cannot register a group to contain
more than three levels of subgroups.
Modify the group so that it contains
three levels of groups or less.
–
You selected the One-touch that
has already been registered,
when you are registering group
addresses.
You selected group addresses that
has already been registered, when
you are registering a One-touch.
–
–
Register the One-touch that is not
used.
–
Check TCP/IP. The machine’s TCP/IP is not
operating.
Check the IP Address Settings in Network
Settings in System Management Set
(from the Additional Functions screen).
(See “Network Settings,” in the e-
Manual.)
Check that all of the covers are
closed.
The cover is open. Check the cover and make sure that it is
completely closed.
12-26
Error Messages
Troubleshooting
Message Description Action
Check the cable. The machine and cable are not
connected properly.
Turn OFF the machine, check that the
machine is connected to the network
using the proper cable, and then turn the
machine ON.
Check the originals. Paper or originals are jammed. Remove any jammed paper or originals.
(See “Clearing Jams,” on p. 12-2)
Clean the scan area. The feeder scanning area may be
dirty.
Clean the feeder scanning area (See
“Scanning Area,” on p. 2-3), then press
[OK].
Hang up the receiver. The receiver of the external
telephone is off the hook.
Hang up the receiver.
Insert the toner cartridge all the
way holding the right & left grips.
A toner cartridge is not installed or
not installed correctly.
Install the toner cartridge correctly tray.
Load paper. No paper is loaded in the paper
cassette or multipurpose tray
when copying or printing.
– Load the paper correctly by inserting
it all the way to the back of the paper
cassette.
–
If the paper size is not appropriate
for printing, <Change Paper Size>
appears.
– Set the appropriate size paper for
printing, and specify the correct
size of paper in <Paper Settings>.
For printing reports or lists, set the
paper size to <LTR>, <LGL>, <STMT>,
<EXEC>, <FLSC>, <OFI>, <B-OFI>, <M-
OFI>, <G-LTRR>, <G-LGL> or <Custom
Size>, and then load paper of the
same size.
–
The appropriate paper for printing
is not loaded.
– After setting the appropriate size
paper for printing, specify the correct
size of paper in the <Paper Settings>
menu.
–
No response from the destination. The server was not running when
you tried to send.
– Check the destination.–
The network connection was lost
when you tried to send. (Either
you could not connect to the
destination or the connection
was lost before the job could
complete.)
– Check the status of the network.–
A TCP/IP error occurred when you
tried to send an e-mail or I-fax.
– Check that the network cables and
connectors are properly connected.
–
No response from the server.
Check the settings.
The specified server settings are
incorrect, or the server is not turned
ON. Alternatively, the machine’s
TCP/IP resources may below.
Wait for a while, and try browsing again.
If you still fail, try selecting another
server.
12-27
Error Messages
Troubleshooting
Message Description Action
Not enough TCP/IP resources.
Wait a moment and perform the
operation again.
You cannot browse the network due
to a lack of TCP/IP resources. This
may be because documents have
just been continuously sent or are
being continuously sent through FTP
or Windows (SMB).
Wait for a while, and try browsing again.
Perform the operation again. A transmission error has occurred
because the line condition was poor.
Check the line condition, then try again.
Prepare a new toner cartridge. The toner is running low. Prepare a new toner cartridge.
Preparing... The machine is not ready for
scanning.
Wait until the machine is ready.
Press the OK key. [Stop] has been pressed while
scanning the document using the
feeder.
Press [OK], then set the originals again.
Printer Error Some kind of error has occurred in
the machine.
Turn OFF the main power switch, wait
for more than 10 seconds, then turn it
ON again. If the message persists, take
a note of the error code that appears
on the bottom left of the display, turn
OFF the main power switch, disconnect
the power cord, and contact Canon
Customer Care Center.
Received in memory. The machine temporarily received
the data in memory because an error
of some kind has occurred in the
machine. This error message appears
with one of the messages below.
<Load paper.>, <A cover is open.>,
<Check that all of the covers are
closed.>, <The paper has jammed.>,
<Remove the jammed paper
from...>, <Replace the toner.>
This error message appears with another
message. When the error is resolved, the
received data will be printed out. For
how to solve the problem, see the action
for the messages displayed with it.
Remove the jammed paper from
inside the cover of the feeder.
An original jam may have occurred in
the feeder.
Remove the jammed original.
Remove the jammed paper from... Paper jams have occurred in the
machine.
Follow the procedure on the screen
to remove the jammed paper. (See
“Clearing Jams,” on p. 12-2)
Remove the original from the
feeder.
The machine cannot scan your
original using the feeder. An original
is placed in the feeder and on the
platen glass.
Remove the original from the feeder.
Remove the paper from the output
tray.
The paper delivery tray is full of
paper.
Remove the printouts from the paper
delivery tray.
12-28
Error Messages
Troubleshooting
Message Description Action
Replace the toner cartridge. Printing is not possible because the
toner has run out.
Replace the toner cartridge. (See
“Replacing the Toner Cartridges,” on
p. 11-7.)
Return page 1 to the top, and then
press the Start key.
Scanning was stopped due to a
problem with the feeder.
Arrange the originals in page order with
the first page on top. Place the originals
back into the feeder’s original supply
tray, and press (Start).
Set the correct paper. The paper size is not appropriate
for printing a report or list.
– Set the paper size to <LTR>, <LGL>,
<STMT>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>,<OFI>, <B-
OFI>, <M-OFI>, <G-LTRR>, <G-LGL> or
<Custom Size>, and then load paper
of the same size.
–
The paper ran out while printing a
received document, report or list.
– Load paper in the paper drawer or
stack bypass tray.
–
Set the IP Address. This machine is not set with an IP
address.
Specify the IP Address Settings in
TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings
in System Management Set (from the
Additional Functions screen), then turn
the machine’s main power OFF and
back ON again. (See “Network Settings,”
or “Setting Up the Machine,” in the e-
Manual.
The counter has reached the set
value.
You cannot print because the set
page limit for either scans, prints,
or copies in the department ID
management function has been
reached.
Contact your system manager.
12-29
Error Messages
Troubleshooting
Message Description Action
The memory is full. The machine is full of jobs.– Print, send, or delete any documents
stored in memory.
Divide the document stack or data into
a few parts and try again one by one.
Send the document with low
resolution.
When this message appears during
using the feeder, the scanning
document stops halfway. In this case,
clear the paper jam from the ADF.
–
–
–
–
The number of TX/RX jobs that can
be stored in memory reached the
maximum.
– The maximum numbers of jobs
that can be stored in memory are
as follows (Based on the condition
that the other party sends the fax
by the Color imageCLASS MF9170c,
MF9150c and MF8450c with ITU-T No.
1 Chart standard mode); Up to 70 jobs
for sending or 90 jobs for receiving,
95 fax jobs including sending and
receiving, or 75 e-mail and I-fax jobs
for receiving.
Wait for the machine to send any
documents in memory. Also print,
send, or delete any documents stored
in memory.
–
The original is too long. The originals fed from the feeder
is longer than 24 7/8" (630 mm), or
are not feeding correctly.
– Reduce the length of the originals
to within 24 7/8" (630 mm), then try
again.
–
The originals are longer than
14" (355.6 mm) when you are
sending e-mail, I-fax or sending a
document to a file server.
– If the originals are shorter than 14"
(355.6 mm), then try the procedure
again.
–
The scan area is dirty. The feeder’s scanning area is dirty. Clean the feeder’s scanning area.
The TEL number is not registered. No destination is registered for the
One-touch you pressed.
Register the destinations before using
the Address Book function.
This size cannot be used with 2-
Sided unit modes.
The paper size is not appropriate for
a two-sided copy.
Set the paper size to <LTR> or <LGL>,
then load paper of the same size.
Wait a moment... This message appears when turning
ON the main power switch, or when
the machine is not ready for printing.
Wait until the message disappears.
12-30
Error Codes
Troubleshooting
Error Codes
If a job or operation does not complete successfully, check the error code, and perform the
necessary operations according to the error code displayed. You can check the error code on
the Details screen when you select <Log> on the System Monitor screen.
If a send, receive, or fax job does not complete successfully, the error code is printed in the
RESULT column on the Activity Report and TX Report.
Perform the necessary procedures according to the error code.
For details on reports, see “Introduction of the Machine,” in the e-Manual.
See the table below for individual error codes.
Error Code Description Action
#0001 Paper or originals are jammed. Remove any jammed paper or originals. (See
”Clearing Jams,” on p. 12-2.)
#0003 Communications that take longer than the preset
time (64 minutes) caused the error.
Reduce the resolution or divide the document
into two or more parts, and then try sending
the document again. (See ”Selecting
Resolution,” on p. 5-41.)
When receiving a document, ask the sender
to either reduce the resolution at which the
document is scanned, or divide the document
into two or more parts before sending it.
–
–
12-31
Error Codes
Troubleshooting
Error Code Description Action
#0005 The recipient did not answer within 35
seconds.
– Confirm that the recipient’s machine is able to
communicate, and try again.
–
The recipient’s machine is not a G3 fax.– Check the type of receiving machine with the
receiving party.
–
#0009 There is no paper.– Load paper. (See “Loading Paper,” on p. 2-10.)–
The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into
the machine.
– Insert the paper drawer properly. (See “Loading
Paper,” on p. 2-10.)
–
#0012 The document could not be sent because the
recipient’s machine was out of paper.
Ask the recipient to load paper into their fax
machine.
#0018 The recipient’s machine did not respond when
your machine redialed.
– Confirm that the recipient’s machine is able to
communicate, and then try again.
–
The documents could not be sent because the
recipient’s machine was busy.
– Confirm that the recipient’s machine is able to
communicate, and then try again.
–
The settings on your machine do not match the
settings on the recipient’s machine.
– Check that the settings on your machine match
those on the recipient’s machine, and that the
recipient’s machine is able to communicate.
Try sending again.
–
No pause was included in the telephone
number when sending a fax overseas.
– Insert a pause after the country code, or after
the fax number of the recipient, and then dial
the number again. (See “Dialing an Overseas
Number (With Pauses),” on p. 5-22.)
Change the Long Distance setting if you are
sending documents to a destination stored
in the Address Book or One-touch. (See
“Registering Fax Numbers in the Address
Book,” on p. 3-2 or “Storing/Editing One-
Touch,” on p. 3-26.)
–
–
#0037 Documents could not be received because
there is insufficient memory available.
– Print, send, or delete any documents stored in
memory.
–
The data size exceeds the available memory.– Reduce the data size by lowering the resolution
or by changing the file format.
–
#0059 Your transmission is canceled because the
number you dialed was different from the
number registered on the other party’s fax
machine.
Check to see that the correct fax number is
registered on the other party’s fax machine.
#0099 A job was interrupted when the Direct Print or
network scan function was being used.
Try to execute the job if necessary.
#0401 When the data was being written to the medium,
the machine detected that the medium was full.
Use the memory medium with sufficient free
space.
12-32
Error Codes
Troubleshooting
Error Code Description Action
#0403 The job was failed because the same file name
existed. Generally, if the same file name exists, a
file will be automatically renamed by adding a
number, which ranges from 1 to 999, to the tail
of its file name in order to avoid naming conflicts.
However, this error occurred because the file with
the same number already added to its file name
existed.
Rename the file, and then write the data again.
#0404 The job was failed because the write protect
switch of the medium was turned ON.
Turn OFF the write protect switch of the medium.
#0407 The job was failed because the medium was
pulled out while the job was in progress.
– Confirm that the medium is properly inserted,
and then write the data again.
–
While data, such as image data, were being
transferred to the medium, some error
occurred.
– Confirm a status of the medium and a file
format.
–
The length of the full path to the specified file
(or folder) exceeded the supported limit.
– The limit of the length of the full path is 120.
Change or shorten the file name to be written.
–
The transfer of the image to the USB memory
was not properly performed because the
length of the full path including the root and
file name exceeded the limit.
– The limit of the length of the full path is 120.
Change or shorten the file name to be written.
–
Change the folder to which the data is saved.–
#0408 The job was failed because the medium was
pulled out while the read job was in progress.
– Confirm that the medium is inserted, and then
read the data again.
–
While the data, such as image data, was being
transferred from the medium, some error
occurred.
– Confirm the staus of the medium and the file
format.
–
#0703 The memory for image data is full when sending
color documents.
Wait a few moments, and then try sending
again after other send jobs are complete.
Erase documents stored in memory. If the
machine still does not operate normally, turn
the main power OFF, and then back ON.
–
–
#0705 The send operation was interrupted because
the size of the image data is larger than
the Send Data Size Limit set in E-mail/I-Fax
Settings in Communications Settings in System
Management Set (from the Additional Functions
screen).
Change the setting for the Send Data Size Limit
in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in Communications
Settings in System Management Set (from the
Additional Functions screen).
Select a lower resolution.
If you are using I-fax, decrease the number of
pages containing images that you are sending
each time, so that you do not exceed the Send
Data Size Limit.
Set Divide into Pages to ‘On’ in the File Format
screen.
–
–
–
–
#0751 The server is not functioning. The network is
down (the server is unable to connect to the
network or was disconnected).
Check the recipient’s address.
Check that the network is up.
–
–
12-33
Error Codes
Troubleshooting
Error Code Description Action
#0752 The SMTP server name for e-mail or I-fax is not
correct, or the server is not functioning.
The domain name or e-mail address may not be
set.
The network is down.
Check the SMTP Server name, domain name, and
E-mail Address in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in Network
Settings in System Management Set (from the
Additional Functions screen).
Check that the SMTP server is operating properly.
Check the network status.
#0753 A TCP/IP error occurred while sending an e-mail
message. (Socket, Select error, etc.)
Check the network cables and connectors. If the
machine still does not operate normally, turn the
main power off, and then back on.
#0755 You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not
functioning correctly.
– Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
System Management Set (from the Additional
Functions screen).
–
The IP address is not set.– Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
System Management Set (from the Additional
Functions screen).
–
When the machine was turned ON, an IP
address was not assigned to the machine by
the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server.
– Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
System Management Set (from the Additional
Functions screen).
–
#0801 A timeout error occurred while the machine
was communicating with the SMTP server to
send an e-mail message.
– Check that the SMTP server is functioning
normally, or check the network status.
–
The SMTP server returned an error while trying
to connect. The destination is not correct.
An error occurred on the server side during
transmission to a file server.
– Check that the SMTP server is functioning
normally. Check the network status. Check
the destination setting. Check the status and
setting of the file server.
–
#0802 The name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax
Settings in Network Settings in System
Management Set (from the Additional Functions
screen) is incorrect.
The DNS server name in DNS Server Settings in
TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System
Management Set (from the Additional Functions
screen) is incorrect.
Connection to the DNS server failed.
Check the name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-
Fax in Network Settings in System Management
Set (from the Additional Functions screen). (See
“Setting IPv4 DNS,” in the e-Manual.)
Check the DNS server name in DNS Server
Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings
in System Management Set (from the Additional
Functions screen). (See “Settings from the
Machine (E-Mail/I-fax),” in the e-Manual.)
Check that the DNS server is functioning
normally.
#0804 You have no permission to access the folder. Change the setting on the server to enable access
to the folder.
#0806 An incorrect user name or password was
specified for the sending of a file to a file server.
– Change the user name or password. (See
“Specifying a New Destination (Scan to File
Server),” in the e-Manual.)
–
An incorrect destination was specified for the
sending of an e-mail message or I-fax.
– Check the e-mail or I-fax address.–
12-34
Error Codes
Troubleshooting
Error Code Description Action
#0808 A timeout error occurred while the machine
was communicating with the FTP server.
– Check that the FTP server is functioning
normally.
Check the network status.
–
–
The FTP server returned an error while trying
to connect. The destination is not correct.
An error occurred on the server side during
transmission.
– Check that the FTP server is functioning
normally.
Check the network status.
Check the destination setting.
Check the status and setting of the file server.
–
–
–
–
#0810 A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection
error occurred while receiving an I-fax.
– Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax
Settings in Network Settings in System
Management Set (from the Additional
Functions screen).
Confirm that the POP server is functioning
normally.
Check the network status.
–
–
–
The POP server returned an error during the
connection.
– Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax
Settings in Network Settings in System
Management Set (from the Additional
Functions screen).
Confirm that the POP server is functioning
normally.
Check the network status.
–
–
–
A timeout error occurred on the server while
connecting to the POP server.
– Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax
Settings in Network Settings in System
Management Set (from the Additional
Functions screen).
Confirm that the POP server is functioning
normally.
Check the network status.
–
–
–
#0812 The POP password setting is incorrect. Check the POP Server password in E-mail/
I-Fax Settings in Network Settings in System
Management Set (from the Additional Functions
screen).
#0813 The POP Server name setting is incorrect. Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax
Settings in Network Settings in System
Management Set (from the Additional Functions
screen).
#0816 You have reached the quota for the number of
pages you can scan for faxing.
Reset or increase the page quota or contact your
system administrator.
#0818 You have received data that cannot be processed
(cannot print the attached file).
Check the settings and ask the sender to resend
the data.
#0819 You have received data that cannot be processed
(MIME information is incorrect).
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to
resend the data.
#0820 You have received data that cannot be processed
(BASE 64 or uuencode is incorrect).
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to
resend the data.
12-35
Error Codes
Troubleshooting
Error Code Description Action
#0821 You have received data that cannot be
processed (TIFF analysis error).
– Check the settings, and then ask the sender to
resend the data.
–
The read job failed because TIFF or JPEG files
were not supported or the image data was
corrupted.
– Confirm that the supported file format is used,
and then read data again.
–
#0827 You have received data that cannot be
processed (contains MIME information that is not
supported).
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to
resend the data.
#0828 You have received HTML data. Ask the sender to use a file format other than
HTML, and then resend the data.
#0829 Data that contains more than approximately
1,000 pages is received.
This machine can store up to approximately 1,000
pages of data in memory, but will delete any data
that exceeds this limit. Ask the sender to resend
the remaining pages.
#0839 The user name or password for the SMTP
Authentication in Authentication/Encryption
in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System
Management Set (from the Additional Functions
screen) is incorrect.
Check the user name and password for SMTP
Authentication in Authentication/Encryption
in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System
Management Set (from the Additional Functions
screen). (See “Confirming Necessary Information
for Scan to E-Mail and I-fax,” in the e-Manual.)
12-36
If <Set the correct paper. > is displayed
Troubleshooting
If <Set the correct paper. > is displayed
When <Set the correct paper. > appears on the display, the size of the paper in the paper
drawer or stack bypass tray is dierent from that of the paper specied in <Drawer 1>,
<Drawer 2>*, or <Stack Bypass Paper> of <Paper Settings>. You need to load the correct
size paper or change the paper size in <Drawer 1>, <Drawer 2>*, or <Stack Bypass Paper> of
<Paper Settings>.
* Only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) is attached.
For print jobs, you need to specify the paper size from your computer.
Reloading the Paper
1
Load the correct size paper as shown on
the display, then press [OK] to resume the
job.
The machine re-starts printing.
Changing the Paper Size Setting
For the stack Bypass Tray
If you set the standard settings for stack bypass tray, follow the procedures below to change paper size.
●
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
12-37
If <Set the correct paper. > is displayed
Troubleshooting
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Paper Settings>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Stack Bypass Paper (Std.)>, then press
[OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<On>, then press the right Any key to
select <Option>.
If you do not want to set the stack bypass
standard settings, select <O>, then press [OK],
and press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
paper size, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper sizes:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <STMT>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>,
<OFI>, <B-OFI>, <M-OFI>, <G-LTRR>, <G-LGL>,
<Custom Size>, <COM 10>, <Monarch>, <DL>,
<ISO-C5>, <ISO-B5>
If you use A/B size paper, press the right Any key
to select <A/B Sizes> and select the paper size
you want to use.
7
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
paper type, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain>, <Plain H>, <Recycled Paper>, <Color>,
<Bond>, <Heavy 1>, <Heavy 2>,
<Transparencies>, <Labels>, <Rough>
8
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
12-38
If <Set the correct paper. > is displayed
Troubleshooting
For the Paper Drawer
Follow this procedure to change the paper size setting.
●
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func.>.
3
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Paper Settings>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
<Drawer 1> or <Drawer 2>*, then press
[OK].
* Only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper
Drawer 2) is attached.
5
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
paper size, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper sizes:
<LTR>, <LGL>, <EXEC>, <FLSC>, <OFI>,
<B-OFI>, <M-OFI>
If you use A/B size paper, press the right Any key
to select <A/B Sizes> and perform the step
above.
6
Use [▼], [▲] or (Scroll Wheel) to select
paper type, then press [OK].
You can select from the following paper types:
<Plain>, <Plain H>, <Recycled Paper>, <Color>,
<Bond>, <Heavy 1>, <Heavy 2>,
<Transparencies>, <Labels>, <Rough>
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
12-39
If a Power Failure Occurs
Troubleshooting
If a Power Failure Occurs
If power is suddenly lost due to an outage or accidental unplugging, a built-in battery
retains the user data settings and the Address Book settings. Any sent or received
documents stored in memory are backed up for about 60 minutes.
During a power cut, functions are limited as follows:
You cannot send, receive, copy, or print documents.
You may not be able to make telephone calls using an external telephone, depending on the type of
telephone you use.
You can receive telephone calls using an external telephone depending on the type of telephone you use.
To fully charge the built-in battery, it takes approximately 2 hours when the main power switch is on. If the built-in battery is not fully
charged, the data may not be saved properly.
Furthermore, charging of the built-in battery may stop if the machine enters sleep mode with the <Sleep Mode Energy Use> set to
<Low>. During the approximate 2 hours it takes to fully charge the built-in battery, set the <Sleep Mode Energy Use> to <High> or
prevent the machine from entering sleep mode by setting the <Auto Sleep Time> to <O>.
–
–
–
12-40
If You Cannot Solve a Problem
Troubleshooting
If You Cannot Solve a Problem
Customer Support (U.S.A.)
If you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter, contact Canon
Customer Care Center at 1-800-828-4040 between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST for U.S.A. and 9:00
A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST for Canada Monday through Friday and 10:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. on Saturday. On-line
support for 24 hours is also available at the website.
http://www.canontechsupport.com/
Customer Support (Canada)
Canon Canada Inc., o ers a full range of customer technical support options*:
For step-by-step troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver or document downloads, and
answers to frequently asked questions, visit
http://www.canon.ca/
Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still
under warranty 1-800-652-2666
For the location of the authorized service facility nearest you, visit
http://www.canon.ca/ or 1-800-652-2666
If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are
available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http://
www.canon.ca/
* Support program speci cs are subject to change without notice.
Please have the following information ready when you contact Canon:
Product name Color imageCLASS MF8450c/Color imageCLASS MF9170c/Color imageCLASS MF9150c
Serial number (On the label located inside top of the front cover)
Place of purchase
Nature of problem
Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results
If the machine makes strange noises, emits smoke or odd odor, turn o the main power switch immediately, disconnect the power
cord, and contact Canon Customer Care Center. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself.
Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty.
–
–
–
–
●
–
–
–
–
–
Machine Settings
This chapter explains how to change and check the machine settings.
Machine Settings Chapter
13
Machine Settings .......................................................13-2
Printing USER’S DATA LIST ............................................. 13-2
Accessing the Setting Menu ......................................... 13-3
Setting Menu .............................................................13-5
Paper Settings ....................................................................13-5
Volume Settings ................................................................13-6
Common Settings .............................................................13-6
Communications Settings ............................................. 13-8
Address Book Settings ..................................................13-11
Printer Settings ................................................................13-13
Timer Settings ..................................................................13-17
Adjustment/Cleaning ....................................................13-18
Report Settings ................................................................13-19
System Management Settings ...................................13-19
13-2
Machine Settings
Machine Settings
Machine Settings
You can adjust the machine settings from the Setting Menu to customize the way the
machine works. To see the list of current settings, print out USER’S DATA LIST.
Printing USER’S DATA LIST
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func>.
3
Use [▼], [▲], or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Report Settings>, then press [OK].
4
Use [▼], [▲], or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Print List>, then press [OK].
5
Use [▼], [▲], or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <User’s Data List>, then press [OK].
13-3
Machine Settings
Machine Settings
6
Use [▼], [▲], or (Scroll Wheel) to
select <Yes>, then press [OK].
If you do not want to print the list, Use [▼], [▲],
or (Scroll Wheel) select <NO>, then press
[OK].
7
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
1
Press (Main Menu).
2
Press the right Any key to select
<Additional Func>.
3
Use [▼], [▲], or (Scroll Wheel) to
select the menu you want to access, then
press [OK].
<Paper Settings>
<Volume Settings>
<Common Settings>
<Communications Settings>
<Address Book Settings>
<Printer Settings>
<Timer Settings>
<Adjustment/Cleaning>
<Report Settings>
<System Management Set.>
Accessing the Setting Menu
13-4
Machine Settings
Machine Settings
4
Use [▼], [▲], or (Scroll Wheel) to
select a submenu, then press [OK].
For details on the submenu, see “Setting Menu,”
on p. 13-5.
5
To register the settings or go to a
submenu item, press [OK].
6
Press (Main Menu) to return to the
Main Menu screen.
13-5
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Setting Menu
The default settings are indicated in bold text.
Depending on the country of purchase, some settings may not be available.
The menus described in this section are based on the model Color imageCLASS MF9170c.
Depending on the model of your machine, some settings may not be available.
Paper Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Stack Bypass Paper (Std.) Off
On
–
–
p. 2-20
Paper Size Inch Size : LTR, LGL, STMT, EXEC, FLSC, OFI,
B-OFI, M-OFI, G-LTR, G-LGL, Custom Size,
COM10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5
A/B Size : A4, A5, B5
–
–
Paper Type Plain, Plain H, Recycled Paper, Color, Bond,
Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Transparencies, Labels,
Rough
Drawer 1
p. 2-22
Paper Size Inch Size : LTR, LGL, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI,
M-OFI,
A/B Size : A4, A5, B5
–
–
Paper Type Plain, Plain H, Recycled Paper, Color, Bond,
Heavy 1, Rough
Drawer 2*
Paper Size Inch Size : LTR, LGL, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI,
M-OFI,
A/B Size : A4, A5, B5
–
–
Paper Type Plain, Plain H, Recycled Paper, Color, Bond,
Heavy 1, Rough
* Only when the Casette Feeding Unit-AC1 (Optional) is attached.
–
–
–
13-6
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Volume Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Monitor Volume Settings Volume Key Settings Priority
Screen Settings Priority
–
–
e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
Audible Tones
Incoming Ring Off
On (1 to 3)(1)
–
–
Entry Tone Off
On (1 to 3)(1)
–
–
Error Tone Off
On (1 to 3)(1)
–
–
TX Done Tone Off
On (1 to 3)(1)
–
–
Receive Done Tone Off
On (1 to 3)(1)
–
–
Print Done Tone Off
On (1 to 3)(1)
–
–
Scan Done Tone Off
On (1 to 3)(1)
–
–
Common Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Initial Function Settings
e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
Select Initial Function Main Menu, Copy, Scan to Send, Scan to
Store, Direct Print*
Set System Monitor to Def. Off
On
–
–
Status Monitor Device Off
On
–
–
Custom Key Registration
p. 1-8
Key 1 Copy, Send/Fax, Scan to Send, FAX, E-mail,
I-Fax, File Server Send Log, Address Book,
Favorites, One-touch, Scan to Store, Store on
Memory Media, Remote Scan, Direct Print*
Key 2 Copy, Send/Fax, Scan to Send, FAX, E-mail,
I-Fax, File Server Send Log, Address Book,
Favorites, One-touch, Scan to Store, Store on
Memory Media, Remote Scan, Direct Print*
(The default settings is Store on Memory
Media for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c and
MF9150, Send/Fax for the Color imageCLASS
8450c)
13-7
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Brightness Adjustment Darker - Brighter (5)
e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
Reverse Color Display Off
On
–
–
Auto Clear Settings Selected Function
Initial Function
–
–
Inch Entry Off
On
–
–
Auto Drawer Selection
Copy
Stack Bypass Off
On
–
–
Drawer 1 Off
On
–
–
Drawer 2 Off
On
–
–
Printer
Drawer 1 Off
On
–
–
Drawer 2 Off
On
–
–
Receive
Stack Bypass Off
On
–
–
Drawer 1 Off
On
–
–
Drawer 2 Off
On
–
–
Other
Stack Bypass Off
On
–
–
Drawer 1 Off
On
–
–
Drawer 2 Off
On
–
–
Sleep Mode Energy Use Low
High
–
–
13-8
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Paper Feed Method Switch
e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
Stack Bypass Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
–
–
Drawer 1 Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
–
–
Drawer 2 Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
–
–
Language Switch Off
On
–
–
Error when Feeder is Dirty Off
On
–
–
Initialize Common Settings No
Yes
–
–
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c/MF9150c.
Communications Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Common Settings
TX Settings
Register Unit Name Max. 24 characters p. 5-14
Data Compression Ratio High Ratio
Normal
Low Ratio
–
–
–
e-Manual
“Scan”
“E-mail”
Retry Times 0 to 5 Times (3) e-Manual
“Fax”
“Scan”
“E-mail”
Change Send Func. Mode Register
Initialize
–
–
e-Manual
“Fax”
“Scan”
“E-mail”
Color Mode Settings Color PDF (Compact)
Color PDF
Color JPEG
B&W TIFF
B&W PDF
–
–
–
–
–
e-Manual
“Scan”
“E-mail”
Divide Pages Off
On
–
–
13-9
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Resolution Settings 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi
(Normal), 200 × 200 dpi (Fine), 200 × 400 dpi
(Super Fine), 300 × 300 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi
(Ultra Fine), 600 × 600 dpi
e-Manual
“Fax”
“Scan”
“E-mail”
Density/Background Removal Lighter - Darker (0) e-Manual
“Fax”
“Scan”
“E-mail”
Background Off
Background Removal
Background Fine Adjust. (Yellow, Red,
Green, Blue)
–
–
–
e-Manual
“Fax”
“Scan”
“E-mail”
Original Type Text/Photo
Text
Photo
–
–
–
e-Manual
“Fax”
“Scan”
“E-mail”
Priority level Text Priority - Photo Priority (0)
2-sided Original Settings Off
Book Type Original
Calender Type Original
–
–
–
p. 5-47
TX Terminal ID Off
On
–
–
p. 5-80
Printing Position Inside
Outside
–
–
Tel. Number Mark FAX
TEL
–
–
Color Send Gamma Value Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8, Gamma
2.2
e-Manual
“Scan”
“E-mail”
Sharpness Low - High (0)p. 5-83
PDF (Compact) Img. Quality
e-Manual
“Scan”
“E-mail”
Text/Photo, Photo Mode Data Size Priority
Normal
Image Quality Priority
–
–
–
Text Mode Data Size Priority
Normal
Image Quality Priority
–
–
–
Default Screen for Send Favorites
One-touch
Default Screen
–
–
–
p. 5-85
Initialize TX Settings No
Yes
–
–p. 5-87
13-10
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
RX Settings
2-sided Print Off
On
–
–p. 5-91
Receive Reduction Off
On
–
–
p. 5-93
RX Reduction Auto
Fixed Reduction
–
–
Reduce % 97%, 95%, 90%, 75%
Reduce Direction Vertical and Horizontal
Vertical Only
–
–
Received Page Footer Off
On
–
–p. 5-96
Toner Out Continuous Print Off
On
–
–p. 5-98
YCbCr Receive Gamma Val. Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8, Gamma
2.2
e-Manual
“E-mail”
Fax Settings
User Settings
Register Unit Telephone # Max. 20 characters p. 5-16
Tel. Line Type Selection
p. 5-13
Manual Pulse
Tone
–
–
TX Settings
ECM TX Off
On
–
–p. 5-67
Set Pause Time 1 to 15 Seconds (2) e-Manual
“Fax”
Auto-redial Off
On
–
–
p. 5-71
Redial Times 1 to 10 Times (2)
Redial Time 2 to 99 Minutes (2)
TX Error Redial Off
On
–
–
Check Tone Before Sending Off
On
–
–p. 5-74
RX Settings
ECM RX Off
On
–
–p. 5-100
13-11
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Reception Mode Selection Auto RX
Fax/TEL Auto Switch
Manual RX
Answer Mode
DRPD. Select Fax
–
–
–
–
–
p. 5-9
Incoming Ring Off
On 1 to 99 seconds (2)
–
–p. 5-102
Remote RX Off
On 00 to 99 ID
–
–p. 5-104
Manual/Auto Switch Off
On 1 to 99 seconds (15)
–
–p. 5-106
RX Restriction Off
On
–
–p. 5-108
Address Book Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Register Address*
Fax
p. 3-2
Register Name Max. 16 characters
Destination Registration Max. 120 characters
ECM TX Off
On
–
–
Sending Speed 33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps
Long Distance Domestic, Long Distance 1, Long Distance 2,
Long Distance 3
E-Mail
p. 3-7
Register Name Max. 16 characters
Destination Registration Max. 120 characters
I-Fax
p. 3-10
Register Name Max. 16 characters
Destination Registration Max. 120 characters
13-12
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
File
p. 3-12
Register Name Max. 16 characters
Destination Registration FTP, Windows (SMB), Windows (SMB): Browse
Host Name Max. 120 characters
Folder Name Max. 120 characters
User Name Max. 24 characters
Password Max. 24 characters
Group
p. 3-18
Register Name Max. 16 characters
Destination Registration Max. 299 destinations
Register One-Touch
Fax
p. 3-26
Register Name Max. 16 characters
Register One-Touch Name Max. 12 characters
Destination Registration Max. 120 characters
ECM TX Off
On
–
–
Sending Speed 33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps
Long Distance Domestic, Long Distance (1), Long Distance
(2), Long Distance (3)
E-Mail
p. 3-31
Register Name Max. 16 characters
Register One-Touch Name Max. 12 characters
E-mail Address Max. 120 characters
I-Fax
p. 3-34
Register Name Max. 16 characters
Register One-Touch Name Max. 12 characters
I-Fax Address Max. 120 characters
13-13
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
File
p. 3-37
Register Name Max. 16 characters
Register One-Touch Name Max. 12 characters
Protocol FTP, Windows (SMB), Windows (SMB): Browse
Host Name Max. 120 characters
Folder Name Max. 120 characters
User Name Max. 24 characters
Password Max. 24 characters
Group
p. 3-44
Register Name Max. 16 characters
Register One-Touch Name Max. 12 characters
Destination Registration Max. 299 destinations
(Max. 199 destinations for the Color
imageCLASS 8450c)
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c and MF9150c.
Printer Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Number of Copies 1 to 999 Copies (1) e-Manual
“Print”
2-sided 2-sided
1-sided
–
–p. 7-10
Paper Feed
e-Manual
“Print”
Default Paper Size LTR, LGL, STMT, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI, M-OFI,
G-LTR, G-LGL, COM10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5,
ISO-B5, A4, A5, B5
Default Paper Type Plain, Plain H, Recycled Paper, Color, Heavy
1, Heavy 2, Transparencies, Labels, Rough,
Envelope
13-14
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Printing Quality
e-Manual
“Print”
Gradation level High Gradation 1
High Gradation 2
–
–
Toner Density
Cyan (C) Lighter - Darker (0)
Magenta (M) Lighter - Darker (0)
Yellow (Y) Lighter - Darker (0)
Black (Bk) Lighter - Darker (0)
Save Toner Off
On
–
–
Line Control Resolution Priority
Gradation Priority
–
–
Layout
Margin Direction Long Edge
Short Edge
–
–
Unit of Measure Millimeter
Inch
–
–
Margin -1.97 to +1.97 inch (0.00)
(-50.0 to +50.0 mm (0.0))
Auto Error Skip Off
On
–
–
Collate Off
On
–
–
Timeout Off
Timeout (5 to 300 seconds) (15)
–
–
Color Mode Auto Detect
Color
Black and White
–
–
–
Gradation Settings
Gradation Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
–
–
–
Graphics Off
On
–
–
Image Off
On
–
–
Compressed Image Output Output
Display Error Massage
–
–
Initialize Printer Settings No
Yes
–
–
13-15
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
PCL Setting*
e-Manual
“Print”
Paper Save Off
On
–
–
Orientation Portrait
Landscape
–
–
Font Number 0 to 91 (0)
Point Size 4.00 to 999.75 point (12)
Pitch 0.44 to 99.99 cpi (10)
Form Lines 5 to 128 Lines (60)
Symbol Set DESKTOP, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17,
ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5,
ISOL6, ISOL9, LEGAL, MCTEXT, PC775, PC8,
PC850, PC852, PC858, PC8DN, PC8TK, PC1004,
PSTEXT, Roman9, ROMAN8, WIN30, WINBALT,
WINL1, WINL2, and WINL5
Custom Paper Size Setting Off
On
–
–
Unit of Measure Millimeter
Inch
–
–
Width 3.00 to 8.50 inch (8.50)
(76.2 to 216.0 mm (216.0))
Height 5.00 to 14.00 inch (14.00)
(127.0 to 356.0 mm (356.0))
Append CR to LF Yes
No
–
–
Enlarge A4 Print Width Off
On
–
–
Halftones Off
On
–
–
Text Resolution
Gradation
–
–
Graphics Resolution
Gradation
–
–
Image Resolution
Gradation
–
–
13-16
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
RGB Source Profile
e-Manual
“Print”
Text sRGB
Gamma 1.5
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.4
–
–
–
–
Graphics sRGB
Gamma 1.5
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.4
–
–
–
–
Image sRGB
Gamma 1.5
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.4
–
–
–
–
Output Profile
Text Normal
Photo
–
–
Graphics Normal
Photo
–
–
Image Normal
Photo
–
–
Matching Method
Text Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
–
–
–
Graphics Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
–
–
–
Image Perceptual
Saturation
Colorimetric
–
–
–
Gray Compensation
Text Off
On
–
–
Graphics Off
On
–
–
Image Off
On
–
–
CMS (Matching) Selection Printer
Host
–
–
13-17
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
CMS (Matching) / Gamma
e-Manual
“Print”
Text Gamma
CMS
–
–
Graphics Gamma
CMS
–
–
Image Gamma
CMS
–
–
Gamma Correction
Text 1.0, 1.4, 1.8, 2.2
Graphics 1.0, 1.4, 1.8, 2.2
Image 1.0, 1.4, 1.8, 2.2
Advanced Smoothing
Advanced Smoothing Off
Smooth 1
Smooth 2
–
–
–
Graphics Off
On
–
–
Text Off
On
–
–
* Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9170c.
Timer Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Date/Time Settings
Current Time Settings MM/DD/YYYY p. 5-12
Time Zone Settings GMT-12:00 to GMT+12:00 (GMT-5:00) e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
Daylight Saving Time Set. Off
On
–
–p. 1-24
Auto Sleep Time Off
On (3 to 240 minutes) (15)
–
–p. 1-22
Auto Clear Time 0=Off, 1 to 9 minutes (2) p. 1-23
13-18
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Adjustment/Cleaning
Item Settings Applicable Page
Auto Gradation Correction
e-Manual
“Maintenance”
Full Correction Test Print 1
Quick Correction Start
Copy Image Correction Test Print 1
Feeder Dirty Auto Correct. Off
On
–
–
First Calibration Off
On
–
–
ACS Function Adjustment
Feeder Color Priority - B&W Priority (0)
Platen Glass Color Priority - B&W Priority (0)
Color Black Char. Process
Feeder Color Priority - B&W Priority (0)
Platen Glass Color Priority - B&W Priority (0)
Image Special Processing Off
Level 1
Level 2
–
–
–
Paper Length Confirmation Off
On
–
–
Special Mode P Off
On
–
–
Fixing Unit Cleaning Start Cleaning p. 11-3
Feeder Cleaning Start p. 11-5
13-19
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Report Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Settings
e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
TX Report Off
On
Only When Error Occurs
–
–
–
Activity Report
Display Send Original Off
On
–
–
Color Send Original Display Off
On
–
–
Auto Report Off
On
–
–
Send/Receive Separate Off
On
–
–
RX Report Off
On
Only When Error Occurs
–
–
–
Print List
Address Book List
Address Book No
Yes
–
–
One-Touch No
Yes
–
–
User’s Data List No
Yes
–
–p. 13-2
System Management Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
System Manager Info. Set.
e-Manual
“Security”
System Mgmt. Dept.ID Max. 7 digits
System Mgmt. Password Max. 7 digits
System Manger Name Max. 32 characters
Device Info. Settings
p. 1-18
Device Name Max. 32 characters
Location Information Max. 32 characters
Dept. ID Management Off
On
–
–
e-Manual
“Security”
13-20
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Register Dept.ID/Pass
e-Manual
“Security”
Register
Dept. ID Max. 7 characters
Password Max. 7 characters
Limit On/Off & Page Limit
Total Prints Off
On (0 to 999999)(0)
–
–
Total Color Print Off
On (0 to 999999)(0)
–
–
Total Black Off
On (0 to 999999)(0)
–
–
Color Copy Off
On (0 to 999999)(0)
–
–
Color Scan Off
On (0 to 999999)(0)
–
–
Color Print Off
On (0 to 999999)(0)
–
–
Black Copy Off
On (0 to 999999)(0)
–
–
Black Scan Off
On (0 to 999999)(0)
–
–
Black Print Off
On (0 to 999999)(0)
–
–
Page Totals Total Prints, Total Color Print, Total Black
Prints, Color Copy, Color Scan, Color Print,
Black Copy, Black Scan, Black Print
Print List All, Total Print Only, Color Only, Black Only
All Clear No
Yes
–
–
Allow Unknown ID Printing Off
On
–
–
Allow Unknown ID R. Scan Off
On
–
–
Allow Unknown Black Copy Off
On
–
–
User ID Management Off
On
–
–
13-21
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Network Settings
e-Manual
“Network Settings”
TCP/IP Settings
IPv4 Settings
IP Address Settings
Manual Settings Off
On
–
–
IP Address IP Address (0.0.0.0)
Subnet Mask IP Address (0.0.0.0)
Gateway Address IP Address (0.0.0.0)
Obtain Automatically Off
On
–
–
DHCP Off
On
–
–
BOOTP Off
On
–
–
RARP Off
On
–
–
PING Command IP Address
IP Address Range Settings Off
On
–
–
Register
Single Address IP Address
Multiple Destinations Max. 10 IPv4 Addresses
DNS Settings
DNS Server Address
Primary DNS Server IP Address (0.0.0.0)
Secondary DNS Server IP Address (0.0.0.0)
DNS Host/Domain Name
Host Name Max. 47 characters (Canon****** (“******”
represents the last six digits of a MAC
address))
Domain Name Max. 47 characters
DNS Dynamic Update
Settings
Off
On
–
–
13-22
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
IPv6 Settings
e-Manual
“Network Settings”
Use IPv6 Off
On
–
–
Stateless Address Settings Off
On
–
–
Manual Address Settings Off
On
–
–
Manual Address IP Address
Prefix Length 0 to 128 (64)
Default Router Address IP Address
Use DHCP v6 Off
On
–
–
PING Command
IPv6 address IP Address
Host Name Max. 47 characters
IP Address Range Settings Off
On
–
–
Register
Single Address IP Address
Multiple Destinations Max. 10 IPv6 Addresses
Prefix Address IP Address
13-23
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
DNS Setting
e-Manual
“Network Settings”
DNS Server Settings
Primary DNS Server IP Address
Secondary DNS Server IP Address
DNS Host/Domain Name
Use Same Host Name/
Domain Name as IPv4
Off
On
–
–
Host Name Max. 47 characters (Canon****** (“******”
represents the last six digits of a MAC
address))
Domain Name Max. 47 characters
DNS Dynamic Update Set. Off
On
–
–
Manual Address Regist. Off
On
–
–
Register Stateful Address Off
On
–
–
WINS Configuration Off
On
–
–
WINS Server Address IP Address (0.0.0.0)
LPD Print Settings Off
On
–
–
RAW Print Settings Off
On
–
–
Use Bidirectional Off
On
–
–
WSD Print Setting
Use WSD Print Off
On
–
–
Use WSD Browsing Off
On
–
–
Use Multicast Discovery Off
On
–
–
Use PASV Mode for FTP Off
On
–
–
FTP Extension Off
On
–
–
Use HTTP Off
On
–
–
13-24
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Port Number Settings
e-Manual
“Network Settings”
LPD 1 to 65535 (515)
RAW 1 to 65535 (9100)
HTTP 1 to 65535 (80)
SMTP Receive 1 to 65535 (25)
POP3 Receive 1 to 65535 (110)
FTP Sending 1 to 65535 (21)
SMTP Sending 1 to 65535 (25)
SNMP 1 to 65535 (161)
Proxy Settings
Use Proxy Off
On
–
–
HTTP Proxy Server Address Max. 128 characters
HTTP Proxy Server Port
Number
1 to 65535 (80)
Use Proxy within the Same
Domain
Off
On
–
–
Use Proxy Authentication
Settings
Off
On
–
–
User Name Max. 24 characters
Password Max. 24 characters
Receive MAC Address Off
On
–
–
Confirm Dept. ID/Password Off
On
–
–
SMB Settings Off
On
–
–
Server Name Max. 15 characters
Workgroup Max. 15 characters
Comment Max. 48 characters
Use LM Announce Off
On
–
–
13-25
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
SNMP Settings Off
On
–
–
e-Manual
“Network Settings”
Community Name 1 Max. 15 characters (Public)
Community Name 2 Max. 15 characters
Writable SNMP1 Off
On
–
–
Writable SNMP2 Off
On
–
–
Printer Mgt Info from Host Off
On
–
–
Dedicated Port Settings On
Off
–
–
Startup Time Settings 0 to 300 seconds (0)
Ethernet Driver Settings
Auto Detect On
Off
–
–
Communication Mode Half Duplex
Full Duplex
–
–
Ethernet Type 10Base-T
100Base-TX
–
–
E-mail/I-Fax
SMTP Receive Off
On
–
–
POP Off
On
–
–
SMTP Server Max. 48 characters
E-mail Address Max. 64 characters
POP Server Max. 48 characters
POP Address Max. 32 characters
POP Password Max. 32 characters
POP interval 0 to 99 minutes (0)
13-26
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Authentication/
Encryption
e-Manual
“Network Settings”
POP Auth. before Send Off
On
–
–
SMTP Authentication Off
On
–
–
User Name Max. 64 characters
Password Max. 32 characters
Communication Settings
E-mail / I-Fax Settings
Send Data Size Limit 0 to 99 MB (3)
e-Manual
“Fax”
“E-mail”
Divide TX Data Oversize Off
On
–
–
Default Subject Max. 40 characters (Attached Image)
Fax Settings
Send Start Speed 33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps,
4800bps, 2400bps p. 5-89
Receive Start Speed 33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps,
4800bps, 2400bps p. 5-110
Memory Lock Settings Off
On
–
–
p. 5-112
Memory Lock Password Max. 7 digits
Report Print Off
On
–
–
Memory Lock Time Settings Do not Specify
Specify
–
–
13-27
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Forwarding Settings
Register
p. 5-117
Fowarding Cond. Name Max. 50 characters
Forwarding Condition Setting Fax
I-Fax
–
–
Forwarding Condition disregard, equals, differs from, begins with,
ends with, contains, does not contain
Forwarding Destination Select from the list of registered addresses
File Format When <Fax> is selected in <Forwarding
Conditions Settings>:
TIFF
PDF
When <I-Fax> is selected in <Forwarding
Conditions Settings>:
TIFF(Black)/PDF(Color)
TIFF(Black)/JPEG(Color)
PDF
PDF(Black)/JPEG(Color)
–
–
–
–
–
–
Divide Pages Off
On
–
–
Forward w/o Condition
p. 5-121
Forwarding Destination Select from the list of registered addresses
File Format When <Fax> is selected in <Forwarding
Conditions Settings>:
TIFF
PDF
When <I-Fax> is selected in <Forwarding
Conditions Settings>:
TIFF(Black)/PDF(Color)
TIFF(Black)/JPEG(Color)
PDF
PDF(Black)/JPEG(Color)
–
–
–
–
–
–
Divide Pages Off
On
–
–
Erase No
Yes
–
–p. 5-125
Print List No
Yes
–
–p. 5-127
13-28
Setting Menu
Machine Settings
Item Settings Applicable Page
Forwarding Error Settings
p. 5-131
Print Image Off
On
–
–
Store Image to Memory Off
On
–
–
Remote UI Off
On
–
–
e-Manual
“Security”
Restrict the Send Function
e-Manual
“Security”
Address Book Password Max. 7 digits
Restrict New Addresses Off
On
–
–
Allow Fax Driver TX Off
On
–
–
Restrict Sending From Log Off
On
–
–
Confirm Entered Fax No. Off
On
–
–
Restrict Seq. Broadcast Off
Broadcast Confirmation
Prohibit Confirmation
–
–
–
Auto Online/Offline
e-Manual
“Scan”
Auto Online Off
On
–
–
Auto Offline Off
On
–
–
Job Log Display Off
On
–
–
e-Manual
“Security”
Memory Media Store Log Do not retain
Retain
–
–
e-Manual
“Security”
USB Device Off
On
–
–
e-Manual
“Security”
Dept.ID/User Name Display Off
On
–
–
e-Manual
“Security”
PDL Selection (PnP) FAX, UFRII LT, PCL5c, PCL6, UFRII LT (XPS) e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
Update Firmware Off
On
–
–
Follow the Machine’s
instruction
Start Setup Guide No
Yes
–
–
e-Manual
“Introduction of the
Machine”
14-1
Appendix
Specifications .............................................................14-2
General ................................................................................. 14-2
Copier ....................................................................................14-3
Printer ................................................................................... 14-3
Facsimile .............................................................................. 14-4
Telephone ............................................................................ 14-4
Send ....................................................................................... 14-5
Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 (Optional) ..................... 14-6
Index ...........................................................................14-7
Appendix Chapter
14
14-2
Specications
Appendix
Specifications
General
Type Personal Desktop
Power Source 120 V-127 V, 60 Hz (Power requirements differ depending on the country in which
you purchased the product.)
Power Consumption Max: Less than 1300 W, 1350 W (with optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1)
Weight Approx. 96 lb (44 kg)
(including toner cartridges)
Dimensions 21 1/2" (W) × 20 3/4" (D) × 24 7/8" (H) (546 mm (W) × 527 mm (D) × 632 mm (H))
21 1/2" (W) × 21 3/8" (D) × 36 7/8" (H) (546 mm (W) × 543 mm (D) × 936 mm (H))
(with optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1)
Installation Space 21 1/2" (W) × 44 7/8" (D) × 31 1/4" (H) (546 mm (W) × 1140 mm (D) × 792 mm (H))
(with drawer pulled out and with back cover and feeder open)
21 1/2" (W) × 44 7/8" (D) × 43 1/8" (H) (546 mm (W) × 1140 mm (D) × 1095 mm (H))
(with optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 attached, drawer pulled out, and back
cover and feeder open)
Environmental Conditions Temperature: 50 °F–86°F (10°C–30°C) Humidity: 10%–80% RH
Display Languages ENGLISH/FRENCH/SPANISH/PORTUGUESE
Acceptable Documents See “Originals Requirements,” on p. 2-2.
Acceptable Paper Stock See “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
Printable Area See “Printable Area,” on p. 2-9.
Scanning Area See “Scanning Area,” on p. 2-3.
14-3
Specications
Appendix
Copier
Scanning Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi
Printing Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi
Magnification Direct 1:1 ±1.0%
Reduction 1:0.78 (LGL → LTR)
1:0.64 (11" × 17" → LTR)
1:0.50 (11" × 17" → STMT)
Enlargement 1:1.29 (LTR → 11" × 17")
1:2.00 (STMT → 11" × 17")
Auto Zoom 50% - 200%, 1% increments
Copy Speed Color imageCLASS MF9170c/MF9150c:
Direct: Color: 22 ppm (LTR), Black: 22 cpm (LTR)
Color imageCLASS MF8450c:
Direct: Color: 17 cpm (LTR), Black: 17 cpm (LTR)
No. of Copies Max. 99 copies
Warm-Up Time less than 60 sec*. (from when main power switch is turned on until standby
display appears, when temperature is 68°F (20°C) and humidity is 65%)
* Warm-up time may dier depending on the condition and environment of the
machine.
First Print Time Platen glass:
Color imageCLASS MF9170c/MF9150c: less than 13 sec. (LTR)
Color imageCLASS MF8450c: less than 16 sec. (LTR)
Feeder:
Color imageCLASS MF9170c/MF9150c: less than 19 sec. (LTR)
Color imageCLASS MF8450c: less than 22 sec. (LTR)
Printer
Printing Method Indirect electrostatic method (On-demand fixing)
Paper Handling Paper drawer: 250 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2)) x 1
Stack Bypass tray: 100 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2))
–
–
Paper Delivery 250 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2))
Print Speed Copy Speed
Printing Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi (2400 dpi enhanced x 600 dpi)
Number of Tones 256
Toner Cartridge See “Toner Cartridges,” on p. 1-15.
14-4
Specications
Appendix
Facsimile
Applicable Line Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)*1
Compatibility G3
Data Compression Schemes MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Modem Speed 33.6 Kbps
Automatic fallback
Transmission Speed Approx. 3 seconds/page*2 at 33.6 Kbps, ECM-JBIG, transmitting from the memory
Transmission/Reception Memory More than 1000 pages*2
(total pages of transmission/reception)
Fax Resolution <200 × 100 dpi>: 203 pels/in. × 98 lines/in. (8 pels/mm × 3.85 lines/mm)
<200 × 200 dpi>: 203 pels/in. × 196 lines/in. (8 pels/mm × 7.7 lines/mm)
<200 × 400 dpi>: 203 pels/in. × 391 lines/in. (8 pels/mm × 15.4 lines/mm)
<400 × 400 dpi>: 406 pels/in. × 391 lines/in. (16 pels/mm × 15.4 lines/mm)
Dialing Color imageCLASS MF9170c/MF9150c:
Speed dialing
Address Book dialing (100 destinations)
One-touch speed dialing (200 destinations)
Group dialing (299 destinations)
Color imageCLASS MF8450c:
Speed dialing
One-touch speed dialing (200 destinations)
Group dialing (199 destinations)
Regular dialing (with numeric keys)
Automatic redialing
Manual redialing (Recalling from the log.)
Sequential broadcast
(Color imageCLASS MF9170c/MF9150c: 301 destinations
Color imageCLASS MF8450c: 201 destinations)
TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Receiving Automatic reception
Remote reception by telephone (Default ID: 25)
–
–
Report ACTIVITY REPORT (after every 40 transactions)
TX (Transmission)/RX (Reception) REPORT
–
–
*1 The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports 28.8 Kbps modem speed or lower, depending on telephone
line conditions.
*2 Based on ITU-T Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode.
Telephone
Connection External telephone/answering machine (CNG detecting signal)/data modem
14-5
Specications
Appendix
Send
Send to file server
Communication Protocol FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP)
Data Format TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Color) (Compact)
Resolution TIFF, PDF (B&W): 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi,
200 × 400 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi
JPEG, PDF (color): 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi,
600 × 600 dpi
PDF (color) (compact): 300 × 300 dpi
System Environment Windows XP Professional/Home Edition,
Windows 2000 Server/Professional (SP1 or later),
Windows Server 2003,
Windows Vista, Solaris Version 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2
Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Color Mode Color, B&W (black and white)
Original Type Text, Text/Photo, Photo
E-mail and I-Fax Features
Communication Protocol SMTP, POP3, I-FAX (Simple mode)
Data Format TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Compact) (Color)
Resolution I-FAX: 200 ×100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi
TIFF, PDF (B&W): 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi,
200 × 400 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi
JPEG, PDF (color): 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi,
600 × 600 dpi
PDF (color) (compact): 300 × 300 dpi
System Environment Windows XP Professional/Home Edition,
Windows 2000 Server/Professional (SP1 or later),
Windows Server 2003,
Windows Vista, Solaris Version 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2
Original Size E-mail: LTR, LGL, A4, A5, B5
I-Fax: LTR, LGL*1, A4, A5, B5
*1 Sent as LTR
Mail Forwarding Server Software Sendmail 8.93 or later (UNIX)
Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows) (Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service
Pack 1 or later)
Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)
Mail Receiving Server Software Qpopper 2.53 or later (UNIX)
Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows) (Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service
Pack 1 or later)
Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)
14-6
Specications
Appendix
Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 (Optional)
Paper Feeding System 500 sheets × 1 drawer (20 lb (75 g/m2))
Acceptable Paper Stock See “Paper Requirements,” on p. 2-7.
Power Source From the main unit
Dimensions 17 3/8" (W) × 21 3/8" (D) × 12" (H) (440 mm (W) × 543 mm (D) × 304 mm (H))
Weight Approx. 28.7 lb (13 kg)
Specications are subject to change without notice.
14-7
Index
Appendix
Index
Numerics
1 to 2-Sided 4-22, 4-23
2-Sided Copying 4-22
2-Sided Original 5-47
2-Sided Printing 7-10
2 to 1-Sided 4-22, 4-27
2 to 2-Sided 4-22, 4-25
A
Address Book
Erasing 3-24
Registering e-mail addresses 3-7
Registering fax numbers 3-2
Registering group addresses 3-18
Registering I-fax addresses 3-10
Address Book Settings 13-11
Address details
Checking/editing 3-21, 3-47
Adjustment/Cleaning 13-18
Any key 1-7
B
Back cover 1-4
Clearing jams 12-18
[Back] key 1-7
Base Color
Copy 4-19
Fax 5-43
Basic sending method
Scanning documents from a networked
computer 8-9
Scanning documents to a file server 8-5
Scanning documents to a USB memory 8-7
Sending E-Mail Documents 6-5
Sending faxes 5-17
Sending I-faxes 5-25
Sending PC faxes 5-27
C
Canceling
Sending e-mail documents 6-7
Sending fax documents 5-29
Canceling Copy Jobs 4-6
Canceling Print Jobs 7-28
CF card slot 1-10
Change Paper Size
If displayed 12-36
Changing the paper size setting
If <Set the correct paper. > is displayed 12-36
Checking
Fax reception status 5-140
Fax transmission/reception log 5-141
Fax transmission status 5-138
Checking Current Settings 4-60
Checking Print Jobs 7-27
Checking Print Logs 7-29
Checking the device information 1-18
Clean Earth Campaign 11-13
Cleaning
Exterior 11-2
Feeder Automatically 11-5
Fixing Unit 11-3
Platen Glass 11-4
14-8
Index
Appendix
Clearing jams 12-2
Back cover 12-18
Delivery Feeder Unit 12-22
Duplex unit 12-6
Fixing unit 12-16
Inside of the machine 12-13
Original jams 12-3
Paper delivery tray 12-5
Paper Drawer 1 12-10
Paper Drawer 2 12-11
Stack bypass tray 12-8
When the message does not disappear 12-19
[Clear] key 1-6
Collating 4-57
Color Balance 4-51
Deleting 4-56
Recalling 4-55
Registering 4-53
Color Mode 4-7
Common Settings 13-6
Communications Settings 13-8
Control panel 1-3
Left side of control panel 1-10
Main control panel 1-6
Right side of control panel 1-10
Copier
Specifications 14-3
Copy Jobs
Canceling 4-70
Checking 4-69
Copy Logs
Checking 4-71
Custom Copy Ratio 4-32
Customize labels 1-8
Custom key 1 1-7
Custom key 2 1-7
Custom Keys
Registering 1-8
D
Delayed Sending 5-49
Delivery feeder unit (Electrostatic transfer belt)
1-5
Density
Copy 4-17
Fax 5-42
Device Information
Checking 1-18
Direct Sending 5-52
Display 1-7
Display parts and functions 1-11
Copy top screen 1-12
Main menu screen 1-11
Select memory media screen 1-14
Send type selection screen 1-13
Duplex unit 1-5
Clearing jams 12-6
E
E-mail addresses
Registering in One-Touch 3-31
Registering in the Address Book 3-7
Enlarge images (Copy) 4-30
Entering characters 1-19
Erasing addresses from the Address Book 3-24
Erasing One-Touch 3-50
Erasing Shadows/Lines 4-41
Binding Erase 4-41, 4-48
Book Frame Erase 4-41, 4-45
Original Frame Erase 4-41, 4-42
Error codes 12-30
Error indicator 1-6
Error messages 12-25
Ethernet port 1-3
External device jack 1-3
14-9
Index
Appendix
F
Facsimile
Specifications 14-4
Favorites
Erasing 5-58
Registering 5-54
Fax numbers
Registering in One-Touch 3-26
Registering in the Address Book 3-2
Feeder 1-3
File server addresses
Registering in One-Touch 3-37
Fixing unit 1-5
Clearing jams 12-16
Forwarding
Activating settings 5-124
Checking/changing settings 5-128
Erasing settings 5-125
Printing settings 5-127
Storing settings 5-117
Storing settings without conditions 5-121
Front cover 1-5
G
General
Specifications 14-2
Group addresses
Registering in One-Touch 3-44
Registering in the Address Book 3-18
H
How to Use This Guide xiii
I
I-fax addresses
Registering in the Address Book 3-10
If a Power failure occurs 12-39
If <Set the correct paper. > is displayed 12-36
Changing the paper size setting 12-36
Reloading the paper 12-36
If the delivery feeder unit is not installed correctly
12-22
Illustrations used in this manual xiv
Image Quality
Copy 4-34
Fax 5-45
Important safety instructions ix
Inserting Memory Media 7-13
Inside of the machine
Clearing jams 12-13
Introduction to Using Print Functions 7-4
J
Job Recall 5-64
K
Keys and buttons used in this manual xiii
L
Legal Notices xv
Copyright xv
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your
Product and the Use of Images xvii
Third party software xvi
Trademarks xv
Loading paper 2-10
In the paper drawer 2-10
In the Stack Bypass Tray 2-15
[Log In/Out] key 1-6
14-10
Index
Appendix
M
Machine components
External view (back) 1-4
External view (front) 1-2
Internal view 1-5
Machine functions
Overview ii
Machine Setting 13-2
Printing 13-2
Main power indicator 1-6
Main power switch 1-3
Maintenance
Replacing the Toner Cartridges 11-7
When a Message Appears 11-7
Manuals for the machine i
Memory Media 7-11
Mode Memory 4-61
Checking 4-64
Deleting 4-65
Recalling 4-63
Register 4-61
Multiple Copies 4-59
N
Network Connection 7-4
N on 1 4-36
2 On 1 4-36, 4-37
4 On 1 4-36, 4-37
Numeric keys 1-6
O
[OK] key 1-7
One-Touch
Checking/editing address details 3-47
Erasing 3-50
Registering e-mail addresses 3-31
Registering fax numbers 3-26
Registering file server addresses 3-37
Registering group addresses 3-44
Online Help 7-5
online help 7-10
Optional cassette
Specifications 14-6
Optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 1-3
Clearing jams 12-11
Original output tray 1-3
Originals requirements 2-2
Original stopper 1-3
Original supply tray 1-3
Overview
Machine functions ii
Overview of Print Functions 7-2
P
Paper delivery tray 1-3
Clearing jams 12-5
Paper drawer 1-3
Paper Drawer 1
Clearing jams 12-10
Paper Drawer 2
Clearing jams 12-11
Paper Requirements 2-7
Paper Settings 13-5
Paper Source 4-9
Paper stopper 1-3
PCL 7-4
Placing originals 2-4
In the Feeder 2-5
On the platen glass 2-4
Platen glass 1-5
Power failure 12-39
Power socket 1-4
[Power] switch (Sub power supply) 1-6, 1-10
Preface ix
Preset Zoom 4-30
Printable Area 2-9
14-11
Index
Appendix
Printer
Specifications 14-3
Printer Settings 13-13
Printing Documents from Computer 7-5
Printing from Memory Media 7-14
Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print) 7-11
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 7-9
Printing USER DATA LIST 13-2
Processing/Data indicator 1-6
R
Receive mode
Answer 5-7
Auto RX 5-5
DRPD 5-9
Fax/Tel Switch 5-6
Manual RX 5-8
Recycling cartridge 11-13
CANADA PROGRAM 11-17
U.S.A. PROGRAM 11-14
Reduce images (Copy) 4-30
Relationship between original orientation and
preprinted paper output chart 2-24
Removing Memory Media 7-14
Report Settings 13-19
[Reset] key 1-7
Resolution 5-41
S
Safety instructions ix
Scaling Documents 7-7
Scanning Area 2-3
Copy 2-3
Fax 2-3
Scanning area 1-5
Scroll wheel 1-7
SD/MS card slot 1-10
Send
Specifications 14-5
Setting Menu
Address Book Settings 13-11
Adjustment/Cleaning 13-18
Common Settings 13-6
Communication Settings 13-8
PAPER SETTINGS 13-5
Printer Settings 13-13
Report Settings 13-19
System Management Set. 13-19
Timer Settings 13-17
Volume Settings 13-6
Setting paper size and type 2-20
For the paper drawer 2-22
For the stack bypass tray 2-20
Sharpness
Copy 4-39
Fax 5-83
Slide guides 1-3
Slide guides for stack bypass tray 1-3
Specifications 14-2
Copier 14-3
Facsimile 14-4
General 14-2
Optional cassette 14-6
Printer 14-3
Send 14-5
Telephone 14-4
Stack bypass tray 1-3
Clearing jams 12-8
Stack bypass tray extension 1-3
Standard Mode
Changing 4-66
Initializing 4-68
Standard send settings
Restoring to default setting 5-78
Storing 5-76
[Start] key 1-6
[Status Monitor/Cancel] key 1-7
[Stop] key 1-6
14-12
Index
Appendix
Storing/editing Address Book 3-2
Checking/editing address details 3-21
Erasing addresses from the Address Book
3-24
Registering e-mail addresses in the Address
Book 3-7
Registering fax numbers in the Address Book
3-2
Registering file server addresses in the
Address Book 3-12
Registering group addresses in the Address
Book 3-18
Registering I-fax addresses in the Address
Book 3-10
Storing/editing One-Touch 3-26
Checking/editing address details 3-47
Erasing One-Touch 3-50
Registering e-mail addresses in One-Touch
3-31
Registering fax numbers in One-Touch 3-26
Registering file server addresses in One-
Touch 3-37
Registering group addresses in One-Touch
3-44
Registering I-fax addresses in One-Touch
3-34
Symbols Used in this manual xiii
System Management Set. 13-19
T
Telephone
Specifications 14-4
Telephone line jack 1-3
Telephone Line Setting 1-20
Timer Settings 1-22, 13-17
Setting Auto Clear Time 1-23
Setting the daylight saving time 1-24
Setting the sleep mode 1-22
Toner Cartridges 1-5, 1-15
Checking the toner level 1-17
Maintaining 1-16
Replacing 11-8
Transporting the Machine 11-19
U
UFRII LT 7-4
USB Connection 7-4
USB port 1-3
USB Slot 1-10
V
Volume Control Dial 1-6, 1-10
Volume Settings 13-6
W
When the message does not disappear
Clearing jams 12-19
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
17, quai du Président Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON COMMUNICATION & IMAGE FRANCE S.A.S.
12, rue de I’Industrie 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON (U.K.) LTD.
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano, 8 20097 San Donato Milanese (MI) Italy
CANON ESPAÑA, S.A.
c/ Joaquín Costa 41, 28002 Madrid, Spain
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way Suite 400, Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON CHINA CO., LTD.
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
FT5-1831 (010) xxxxxxxxxx © CANON INC. 2008 PRINTED IN CHINA

Navigation menu